Loading...
HomeMy Public PortalAbout614.14 WMS Boys Locker Room 100 CD Specifications Project Manual Watertown Middle School - Boy's Locker Room Renovation 68 Waverly Ave, Watertown, MA 02472 Date: December 18, 2019 Awarding Authority Town of Watertown 149 Main Street Watertown, MA 02472 Tel: (617) 972-6414 Architect Gienapp Architects, LLC 20 Conant Street Danvers, MA Tel: (978) 750-9062 Plumbing, HVAC, and Electrical Engineer BLW Engineers 311 Great Road Littleton, MA 01460 Tel: (978) 486-4301 GIENAPP ARCHITECTS Begin Here. Finish Well. 20 Conant Street 978.750.9062 Danvers, MA 01923 gienapparchitects.com Construction:149 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS: This Project is subject to M.G.L. c 149, as amended. Such a bidder shall possess the skill, ability, and integrity necessary for the faithful performance of the work, shall be able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed, or to be employed, in the work, and shall otherwise comply with all applicable provisions of law. Bids must be endorsed with the Project Name: Watertown Middle School Boys Locker Room Renovation on the outside of the sealed envelope and must be received at the Watertown Town Hall, Purchasing Department, 149 Main Street,Watertown,MA, 02472 no later than as indicated below: For Filed Sub-Bids: Tuesdav February 4th,2020 at 11:00 am. For General Bids: Thursdav February 13',2020 at 11:00 am. at which time all bids will be publicly opened and read aloud. All bidders shall provide certifications if specified within these documents. RULE FOR AWARD: Contractor's having successful experience having completing projects in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts will be considered as "responsive" and eligible for bidding. Contractors should provide evidence of performing this type of service. The Contract will be awarded to "the lowest responsible and eligible bidder" pursuant to General Laws Chapter 149,as amended. The Town of Watertown reserves the right to award one contract to the bidder offering the lowest aggregate price for all items. The Town reserves the right to reject any bid or portion of a bid, to waive any informalities in a bid and to award contract by items or by total to the responsive and responsible bidder who offers the lowest price as shall be deemed in the best interest of the Town. The Town will forward a notice of award to the Contractor within forty-five (45) days of the bid opening. A formal Agreement will be included with the award notice. In addition to the Agreement,the Town will require a Certificate of Corporate Vote or Foreign Corporation signed by the appropriate person authorized to enter into a contract, evidence of insurance liability coverage and submittal of required 100% payment bond and 100% labor and performance bond within 10 days of award. VENDOR RECORDS: The Town reserves the right to request a vendor to maintain vendor records for six (6) years and to provide assistance with any future audit requirements. An Award Notice will be mailed or furnished to the successful bidder within forty-five (45) days of the bid opening. DELIVERY: All prices bid must be on the basis of FOB delivery point,Watertown,MA. LIABILITY OF PARTIES: The Town's liability hereunder shall be limited to the amounts due the Contractor for services actually rendered. BID BOND/PAYMENT BOND AND INSURANCE REOUIREMENTS: Each Bid must be accompanied by a bid security consisting of a Bid Bond, or, Certified Check issued by a responsible bank or trust company in the amount of not less than five (5) percent of the bid price. Properly executed bid security shall be placed in a sealed envelope and shall be attached to the outside of the envelope containing the bid. Within ten days of notification of contract award the successful Contractor will be required to submit a Labor and Materials Payment Bond and a Performance Bond each in the amount of 100% of the contract amount to be held by the Town until all work has been accepted by a Town representative. INSURANCE REOUIREMENTS: The Town will require the Contractor to provide a Certificate of Insurance (Acord Form 25) written to include the following limits: General Liability Commercial Liability: General Aggregate $2,000,000 Products Completed Operations Aggregate $1,000,000 Personal Injury and Advertising Limit $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Automobile Liability-For all owned,non-owned,hired and leased vehicles: Bodily Injury: Each Person/Each Accident $1,000,000 Property Damage: Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Excess Liabilitv: Each Occurrence/Aggregate Umbrella Form $1,000,000 Workers Compensation STATUTORY Builder's Risk Propertv Coverage: For full insurable value (complete value) of the portion of the Work under construction. It should include "All Risk" insurance for physical loss or damage including theft. The above insurance policies shall also be subject to the following requirements: a) Each policy shall contain a thirty-(30)day written notice of cancellation, change or non-renewal to the Town. b) Carriers must have an A.M.Best rating of A-VII or better c) Insurance Policy must cover the entire contract period. d) The description of operations/location/special items on certificate of insurance shall name the Town as an additional insured for " the name of the project" and shall be filed with the Town Purchasing Agent prior to commencement of the contract. e) All premium cost shall be borne by the Contractor. WAGE RATES: The Commonwealth of Massachusetts Department of Labor & Workforce Development for the entire project has established Wage Rates for the entire project in accordance with M.G.L. Chapter 149, Section 26 to 27J. Copies of Certified payroll are to be forwarded weekly or with the submittal of any invoice to the Town. Questions regarding this bid should be directed to the Purchasing Agent by fax 617 972 6414 or e-mail purchasing@watertown-ma.gov will be responded to if received in advance of five (5) business days prior to bids being due. All addenda will be emailed or faxed to those on record for receiving bid documents. BID SUBMITTALS: Any bid being submitted must include a signed certificate of non-collusion, signed tax compliance certificate, the bid- pricing and affirmative participation information, a bid bond and acceptance of any addenda to be considered as "responsive". HEALTH AND SAFETY: Chapter 306 of the Acts of 2004 - an Act Relative to the Health and Safety on Public Construction Projects. The below statement has been added to general contract bid forms. The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work; that all employees to be employed at the worksite will have successfully completed a course in construction safety and health approved by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration that is at least 10 hours in duration at the time the employee begins work and who shall furnish documentation of successful completion of said course with the first certified payroll report for each employee (effective July 1, 2006); and that he will comply fully with all laws and regulations applicable to awards made subject to section 44A. RETURN OF BIDS: All BIDS received by the Town prior to the deadline for BIDS will be returned upon presentation of a signed request and proof of representation to the Purchasing Department. All BIDS received at the deadline for submission for consideration by the Town will remain public record of the Town and will not be returned. BID MODIFICATION: Proposals may be corrected, modified or withdrawn if a written request is received in advance signed by the appropriate representative of the Firm. LICENSE: All bids should include evidence of licenses for staff to be assigned if required and specified in the bid documents. LOCATION OF WORK: The ContractorNendor shall provide all labor, services, materials, equipment, plant, machinery, apparatus, appliances, tools, supplies, and all other things necessary to do all work required for the completion of all items of work and as herein specified. The work to be done and paid for under any item shall not be limited to the exact extent mentioned or described but shall include any incidental work necessary or customarily done for the completion of that item. ABILITY AND EXPERIENCE OF BIDDER: No award will be made to any bidder who cannot satisfy the Town that he has sufficient ability and experience in this class of work and sufficient capital and plant to enable him to prosecute and complete the work successfully within the time named. The Town's decision or judgment on these matters will be final, conclusive, and binding. The owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary, and the bidder shall furnish to the Town, under oath if so required,all such information and data for this purpose as the Town may request. CONDITIONS OF WORK: Each bidder must familiarize himself fully with the conditions relating to the project and the employment of labor thereon. Failure to do so will not relieve a successful bidder of his obligation to furnish all material and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of this contract. Insofar as possible the Contractor, in carrying out his work, must employ such methods or means as will not cause any interruption of or interference with the work of any other Contractor. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS: No interpretations or meaning of plans, specifications or other pre-bid documents will be made to any bidder orally. All information given to bidders other than means of the plans, specifications, or by addenda, as described below, is given informally and shall not be used as the basis of a claim against the Town.All requests for interpretations shall be addressed to the Purchasing Agent, Town of Watertown, 149 Main Street, Watertown, MA, 02472, five (5) days prior to date bids are due. Any and all such interpretations will be in the form of a written addenda to the specifications which, when issued, will be emailed or faxed to those contractors listed to have received bid documents from the Office of the Purchasing Agent, not later than three (3) days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Failure of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder from obligation under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract Documents. LAWS AND REGULATIONS: The bidder's attention is directed to the fact that all applicable State Laws, Municipal Ordinances or Bylaws, and rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over such projects shall apply to the contract throughout, and they will be deemed to be included in the Contract the same as though herein written out in full. LIOUIDATED DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ENTER INTO CONTRACT: Subject to, and except as otherwise may be provided by M.G.L. c149. §44B and 44E. The successful bidder,upon his failure or refusal to execute and deliver the Contract and bonds required within ten(10) days (Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded) after he/she has received notice of award, shall forfeit to the Town, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, a portion of security deposited with his/her bids, but the amount forfeited shall not exceed the difference between his/her bid price and the bid price of the next lowest responsible and eligible bidders. OBLIGATION OF THE BIDDER: At the time of the opening of bids each bidder will be presumed to have inspected the site and to have read and to be thoroughly familiar with the Contract Documents (including all addenda). The failure or omission of any bidder to examine any form, instrument, or document shall in no way relieve any bidder from any obligation in respect of his bid. END OF SECTION Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS Instructions to Bidders Owner-Contractor Agreement BIDDING DOCUMENTS. CONTRACT FORMS. CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 0001 10 Table of Contents 0001 13 Advertisement for Bids 0041 00 Form of General Bid 00 45 19 Certificate of Good Faith (Non-Collusion), Tax Compliance, and Vote Authorization 0041 15 General Conditions 00 45 20 Town of Watertown Noise Ordinance (Prohibition of Noise Emissions) 00 52 00 Contractor-Owner Agreement 00 73 43 Minimum Wage Rates TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 33 00 Submittals 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls DIVISION 02— EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03—CONCRETE 03 30 00 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 04— MASONRY DIVISION 05— METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06—WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry DIVISION 07—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08—OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 71 00 Door Hardware DIVISION 09—FINISHES 09 29 00 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 30 00 Tiling 0951 23 Acoustical Tile Ceilings 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring 0991 23 Interior Painting DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES 1021 16 Plastic Shower and Dressing Compartments 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories * Denotes Filed-Sub Bid TABLE OF CONTENTS Gienapp Architects 00 01 10 - 1 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA DIVISION 21 —FIRE PROTECTION 21 00 01 Fire Protection DIVISION 22— PLUMBING 22 00 01 Plumbing (*FSB) DIVISION 23— HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 01 HVAC (*FSB) DIVISION 26— ELECTRICAL 26 00 01 Electrical (*FSB) END OF TOC LIST OF DRAWINGS: General Proiect Information T-1 Title Sheet T-2 Symbols, Abbreviations, Mounting Heights Demolition D100 Demolition Plans Architectural Al 00 Boys Locker Room Floor Plan A200 Interior Elevations and Plan Details A201 Interior Elevations and Details A202 Gender Neutral Plan and Elevations A600 Partition and Finish Schedules Fire Protection F001 Fire Protection F100 Fire Protection Floor Plans FA100 Fire Alarm Riser Diagram Plumbing P001 Plumbing Legend, Notes and Schedule PD100 Plumbing Demo Plans P100 Plumbing Floor Plan P101 Plumbing Floor Plan Mechanical H001 HVAC Legend and Specifications H002 HVAC Schedules H003 HVAC Details H 100 HVAC Floor Plans Electrical E001 Electrical Legend, Notes and Specifications * Denotes Filed-Sub Bid TABLE OF CONTENTS Gienapp Architects 0001 10 - 2 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA E002 Electrical Fixture Schedule and Details ED100 Electrical Demolition Plan E100 Electrical Lighting and Power Plans * Denotes Filed-Sub Bid TABLE OF CONTENTS Gienapp Architects 0001 10 - 3 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA This Page is Intentionally Left Blank. * Denotes Filed-Sub Bid TABLE OF CONTENTS Gienapp Architects 0001 10 -4 of 4 PUBLIC NOTICE ADVERTISEMENT The Town of Watertown, at 149 Main Street, Watertown, Massachusetts, the Awarding Authority, invites sealed bids for the Renovation project at the Watertown Middle School Boys Locker Room, 68 Waverly Avenue, Watertown, Massachusetts, in accordance with Contract Documents prepared by Gienapp Architects, LLC, 20 Conant Street, Danvers, MA 01923. Bidding procedures and award of the Contract will be in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 149 of the General Laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, as amended. The estimated cost of the project is $500,000.00 Each general bid on this Contract must be accompanied by a copy of a Certificate of Eligibility issued by the Massachusetts Division of Capital Asset Management showing that the bidder has the classification and capacity rating to perform the work required. In order to be eligible to bid on this Contract, a general bidder must be certified for the estimated project cost of the full amount of the contract. The general bidder must be certified in General Building Construction. Each bid must also be accompanied by a Contractor Qualification Statement Update. The Awarding Authority will furnish copies of the Contractor Qualification Statement Update form to any bidder on request. Any bid submitted without the appropriate Certificate of Eligibility and Contractor Qualification Statement Update shall be invalid. Each general bid and each filed sub-bid shall be submitted and will be considered in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders and the other Contract Documents, and shall be accompanied by a bid bond (a) in form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority substantially conforming to the sample contained in the Contract Documents, (b) with a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority, and (c) conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the agreements contained in the bid; or cash; or a certified check; or a treasurer's check; or by cashier's check; issued by a responsible bank or trust company, made payable to the Town of Watertown, in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the bid amount. Sealed bids shall be submitted on a form furnished by the Awarding Authority and clearly identified as a bid, endorsed with the name and address of the bidder, the name of the project, "Watertown Middle School Boys Locker Room Renovation", and submitted to: Raeleen Bandini, Purchasing Agent Watertown Town Hall 149 Main Street Watertown, MA 02472 received no later than the times set forth below, when they will forthwith be publicly opened and read aloud at this location. Sealed bids for the sub-trades designated below will be received until Tuesday, February 4th, 2020 at 11:00am. Sealed bids for the General Contract will be received until Thursday, February 13th, 2020 at 11:00 am. All bids may be mailed or hand-delivered to the above specified receiving address prior to the time specified hereunder, in accordance with the procedures set forth in the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. Filed sub-bids will be required and taken for the following classes of work: SECTION 22 0000 PLUMBING SECTION 23 0000 HVAC SECTION 26 0000 ELECTRICAL Bidders may obtain sets of Contract Documents, after 8:30 a.m., local time, on Thursday, January 15, 2020 at Purchasing office in Watertown Town Hall, 149 Main Street, Watertown, MA, there is no cost for one set. Addenda will be issued to all Bidders registered with the Watertown Purchasing Office. Copies of the FORM FOR GENERAL BID are available at no cost at the above-named location. As an alternative to obtaining hard copy sets of bid documents, bidders may email requests for electronic copies of the bid documents by contacting the Purchasing Office at purchasing@watertown-ma.gov. A PDF file will be emailed back to the requestor at no cost. All plan holders, whether hard copy or electronic copy recipients, must provide two (2) email addresses to receive notifications and update information (including addenda) on this project. Addenda will be sent via email to all plan holders. Copies of the FORM FOR GENERAL-BID are available at no cost at the above-named location. Each bidder is advised to visit the site of the proposed work, become fully acquainted with conditions as they exist, and thoroughly examine the Contract Documents. Failure of any bidder to visit the site, and to examine the Contract Documents shall in no way relieve the bidder from any obligation with regard to the bid as submitted. Arrangements for site visitation, during the bidding period, may be made in the manner set forth in the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. A pre-bid conference will be held at the project site, Watertown Middle School, 68 Waverly Ave, Watertown, MA, on Tuesday, January 28, 2020 at 3:00 PM. This pre-bid conference will assemble outside the main office. All parties attending are required to sign-in at the Middle School main office and provide valid photo ID prior to the start of the conference. The successful Bidder will be required to provide a Labor and Materials Payment Bond and Performance Bond, each bond being in the amount of 100 percent of the Contract Amount. Bonds must be written with a company qualified to do business in Massachusetts and acceptable to the Awarding Authority. The minimum wages to be paid for all labor on the project are established in a schedule issued by the Department of Labor and Workforce Development, in accordance with Section 26A- 27D, of Chapter 149 of the M.G.L., as amended, said schedule being made a part of the Contract Documents and is included therein. Section 6(f) of Chapter 64H of Massachusetts General Laws exempts Massachusetts sales tax on building materials and supplies to be used in the project, and bidders shall not include in their bids any amount therefor. The successful Bidder must agree to commence work as stipulated in the receipt of Notice to Proceed, and complete the work in accordance with the times established in the Contract. The Awarding Authority will reject general bids when required to do so by the above- referenced General Laws. In addition, the Awarding Authority reserves the right to waive any informality in or to reject any or all general bids if it be in the public interest to do so. Attention of all bidders is directed to the requirements of the Supplemental Equal Opportunity, Anti-Discrimination and Affirmative Action Program of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, which is incorporated in the Contract Documents. By: Town of Watertown Raeleen Bandini, Purchasing Agent This Page is Intentionally Left Blank. Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 00 4100 FORM OF GENERAL BID TO THE AWARDING AUTHORITY A. The Undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for the Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation, in Watertown, Massachusetts, in accordance with the accompanying plans and specifications prepared by Gienapp Architects for the contract price specified below, subject to additions and deductions according to the terms of the specifications. B. This bid includes addenda numbered: C. The proposed contract price, without alternates, is: dollars ($ ) For alternate No. 1 Add $ N/A Subtract$ N/A For alternate No. 2 Add $ N/A Subtract$ N/A For alternate No. 3 Add $ N/A Subtract$ N/A D. The subdivision of the proposed contract price is as follows: ITEM 1: The work of the General Contractor, being all work other than that covered by Item 2.: $ dollars ITEM 2: Sub-bids as follows: Bond Required Sub-Trade Name of Sub Bidder Amount "Yes" or "No" (Plumbing) $ (HVAC) $ (Electrical) $ (N/A) $ TOTAL OF ITEM 2 $ The undersigned agrees that each of the above named sub-bidders will be used for the work indicated at the amount stated, unless a substitution is made. The undersigned further agrees to pay the premiums Form of General Bid Gienapp Architects 004100 - Page 1 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA for the performance and payment bonds furnished by sub-bidders as requested herein and that all of the cost of such premiums is included in the amount set forth in Item 1 of this bid. The undersigned agrees that if he is selected as General Contractor, he will promptly confer with the Awarding Authority on the question of sub-bidders; and that the Awarding Authority may substitute for any sub-bid listed above a sub-bid filed with the Awarding Authority by another sub-bidder for the sub-trade against whose standing and ability the undersigned makes no objections; and that the undersigned will use all such finally selected sub-bidders at the amounts named in their respective sub-bids and be in every way as responsible for them and their work as if they had been originally named in this general bid, the total contract price being adjusted to conform thereto. The undersigned agrees that, if he is selected as General Contractor, he will within five (5) days, Saturdays, and Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation thereof by the Awarding Authority, execute a contract in accordance with the terms of this bid and furnish a Performance Bond and also a Labor and Material or Payment Bond, each of a surety company qualified to do business under the Laws of the Commonwealth and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority and each in the sum of the contract price, the premiums for which are to be paid by the General Contractor and are included in the contract price provided, however, that if there is more than 1 surety company, the surety companies shall be jointly and severally liable. The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work; that all employees to be employed at the worksite will have successfully completed a course in construction safety and health approved by the United States Occupational safety and Health Administration that is at least 10 hours in duration at the time the employee begins work and who shall furnish documentation of successful completion of said course with the first certified payroll report for each employee; and that he will comply fully with all laws and regulations applicable to Awards made subject to Section Forty-Four A. The undersigned hereby certifies under the penalties of perjury that this bid is in all respects bona fide, fair and made without collusion or fraud with any other person. As used in this subsection the word "person" shall mean any natural person,joint venture, partnership, corporation or other business or legal entity. The undersigned further certifies under penalty of perjury that the said undersigned is not presently debarred from doing public construction work in the commonwealth under the provisions of section twenty-nine F of chapter twenty-nine, or any other applicable debarment provisions of any other chapter of the General Laws or any rule or regulation promulgated thereunder. Pursuant to G.L. c. 62C, § 49A, the undersigned certifies under the penalties of perjury that, to my best knowledge and belief, have filed all state tax returns and paid all State Taxes Required under law. The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed in the work; that all employees be employed at the worksite will have successfully complete a course in construction safety and health approved by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration that is at least 10 hours in duration at the time the employee begins work and who shall furnish documentation of successful completion of said course with the first certified payroll report for each employee; and that he will comply fully with all laws and regulations applicable to awards made subject to G.L. c. 149, § 44A. Form of General Bid Gienapp Architects 004100 - Page 2 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA Date: (Name of General Bidder) Bv: (Name of Person Signing Bid and Title) (Business Address) Note: If the Bidder is a corporation, indicate state of incorporation under signature, and affix corporate seal. If a partnership, give full names and residential (City, State and Zip Code) addresses of all general partners if different from business addresses. END OF FORM FOR GENERAL BID Form of General Bid Gienapp Architects 004100 - Page 3 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Form of General Bid Gienapp Architects 004100 - Page 4 of 4 CERTIFICATE OF GOOD FAITH (NON-COLLUSION) and TAX COMPLIANCE Pursuant of M.G.L. Ch. 62C, Sec. 49A, I certify under the pains and penalties of perjury that the contractor/consultant has complied with all laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts relating to taxes, reporting of employees and contractors, and withholding and remitting child support. The undersigned certifies under penalties of perjury that this bid has been made and submitted in good faith and without collusion or fraud with any other person. As used in this certification, the word "person" shall mean any natural person, business, partnership, corporation, union, committee, club, or other organization, entity or group of individuals. Name of Person Signing Bid (Please Print) Signature of Person Signing Bid Company CERTIFICATE OF VOTE (required if Contractor is a Corporation] I, hereby certify that I am duly qualified and Acting Secretary of and I further certify that a meeting of the Directors of said Company, duly called and held on , at which all Directors were present and voting, the following vote was unanimously passed: Voted to authorize and empower the person signing the Bid Certification Sheet on behalf of the Corporation. I further certify that the above vote is still in effect and has not been changed or modified in any respect. BY: (Secretary of Corporation) THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Over 25k TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL CONDITIONS PAR. TITLE PAGE 1.01 CONTRACTOR'S WORK................................................... 1-1 1.02 EXAMINATION OF SITE................................................... 1-1 1.03 INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS............................................ 1-1 1.04 IMPLIED AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS.............................. 1-1 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S SIGNATURE.......................................... 1-1 1.06 REJECTION.................................................................... 1-1 1.07 TIME ALLOWANCE......................................................... 1-1 1.08 DELAYS........................................................................ 1-2 1.09 MATERIALS................................................................... 1-2 1.10 EQUIPMENT................................................................... 1-2 1.11 LABOR& INSURANCE...................................................... 1-3 1.12 UTILITIES....................................................................... 1-3 1.13 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.................................................... 1-3 1.14 STORAGE........................................................................ 1-3 1.15 POWER OF TOWN OF WATERTOWN REPRESENTATIVE.... 1-3 1.16 INSPECTION.................................................................... 1-3 1.17 SALVAGE........................................................................ 1-4 1.18 CLEANING UP.................................................................. 1-4 1.19 ACCEPTANCE.................................................................. 1-4 1.20 PAYMENT....................................................................... 1-4 1.21 CHANGES IN WORK......................................................... 1-4 1.22 ADDENDA...................................................................... 1-5 1.23 NON-DISCRIMINATION ARTICLE....................................... 1-5 1.24 ANTI-BOYCOTT COVENANT............................................. 1-5 1.25 EXECUTIVE ORDER NO. 195............................................. 1-5 1.26 BID SECURITY............................................................... 1-5/1-6 1.27 PERFORMANCE BOND(100%)................................................ ..... 1-6 1.28 MATERIAL BOND(100%).................................................... 1-6 1.29 PAYROLL RECORDS......................................................... 1-6 1.30 OSHA REQUIREMENTS..................................................... 1-6/1-7 1.31 TAX EXEMPTION NUMBER............................................... 1-7 Over-25k SECTION I GENERAL CONDITIONS NOTE: ATTENTION IS DIRECTED TO THE STANDARD PRINTED FORM OF PROPOSAL OF WHICH THESE GENERAL CONDITIONS ARE HEREBY MADE A PART. 1.01 CONTRACTOR'S WORK All work to be done as indicated in these specifications and/or plans, or reasonably implied in or on either, shall be done by the Contractor unless specified to be done by others. 1.02 EXAMINATION OF SITE: Each bidder should visit the Town of Watertown, become fully acquainted with the existing conditions there relating to construction and labor, and should become fully informed as to the facilities involved and the difficulties and restrictions attending the performance of the Contract. The bidder should thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Technical Specifications,and all other documents. Bidders must satisfy themselves of the accuracy of the estimated quantities in the bid schedule by examination of the site and a review of the contract documents. 1.03 INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS It is the intention of this specification to delineate a first class piece of work, which when completed, shall present a finished appearance without any indication of careless or inferior material or workmanship. Except where hereinafter otherwise specified, materials and workmanship shall comply with the material manufacturer's most recent specification. 1.04 IMPLIED AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS Should any work or material be required or any compliance with laws of the Commonwealth which is not detailed in the specifications or on the plans either directly or indirectly, but, which is nevertheless necessary for the proper carrying out of the intent thereof, the Contractor is to understand the same to be implied and required, and shall perform all such work, furnish any such material, and comply with any such laws as fully as if they were particularly delineated or described. The Contractor must cooperate and coordinate with Town of Watertown Authorities regarding work to be done to properly execute this contract. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S SIGNATURE The Contractor's signature, in ink, on the bid proposal form will be held as evidence that he/she has familiarized himself/herself with all requirements for proper execution of the project. 1.06 REJECTION The Town of Watertown reserves the right to reject any and all bids, if it deems it is to the best interest of the Town of Watertown. 1.07 TIME ALLOWANCE The work shall commence on the date specified in a written order from the Town of Watertown as the date for such beginning,and shall be completed on or before 90 calendar days from the date of said order. Liquidated damages are assessable at the rate of $1000.00 per day beyond the contract completion date. Assessment of liquidation damages, or a portion thereof,may be waived by the Town of Watertown if the Contractor submits evidence satisfactory to the Town of Watertown that the work has not been completed by the time specified because of delays caused solely by conditions beyond the control of the Contractor. General Conditions 1-1 1.08 DELAYS The authorized representative of the Town of Watertown may delay the commencement of the work, or any part thereof, due to unforeseen circumstances or conditions which have a bearing on the work required under this contract or for any other reason if it is deemed to be in the best interest of the Town of Watertown to do so. The Contractor shall have no claim for damages on account of such delay,but shall be entitled to so much additional time in which to complete the whole or any portion of the work required under this contract as the Town of Watertown shall certify,in writing, to be just. 1.09 MATERIALS .1 Preference in Supplies and Materials Your attention is directed to the provision of Chapter 7,Section 22 amended by Chapter 353 of the Acts of 1933 of the General Laws, which reads as follows: " Section 22, Clause 17" a preference in the purchase of supplies and materials other consideration being equal,in favor: first of supplies and materials within the Commonwealth; the second, of supplies and materials manufactured and sold elsewhere within the United States. .2 Or Equal The words "or equal" are understood to follow the name of any maker, vendor, or proprietary product used in these specifications to define the materials or articles required and are understood to mean any materials or articles which in the opinion of the Town of Watertown is at least equal in quality,durability,appearance and perform at least equally the functions imposed by the general design. .3 Department Inspection and Tests Any material to be used and in the work may be tested or inspected at any time by the Town of Watertown and may be rejected if it fails to comply with specified tests, or if it shall appear not to be first quality material or workmanship. .4 Unsatisfactory Materials All materials furnished and used shall be new and of best quality available. Any material not meeting the approval of the Town of Watertown will be rejected and shall be removed from the Town of Watertown grounds by the Contractor,at no expense to the Town of Watertown. 1.10 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall furnish all tools,materials,labor and equipment required to do and to complete all work required for the satisfactory completion of the contract. General Conditions 1-2 1.11 LABOR& INSURANCE All workman employed on this contract shall not be paid less than the minimum wage rate for this area as designated by the Department of Labor & Industries, Commonwealth of Massachusetts. The Contractor shall furnish, and keep in force for the life of this contract Workman's Compensation Insurance for all workers employed on the job (Chapter 149 G.L. Section 34 A) Contractor's Protective Public Liability and Property Damage Liability Insurance must be maintained at the Contractor's expense during the life of the contract. The contractor shall not commence work on this contract until proof of compliance has been furnished to the Town of Watertown on both Worker's Compensation and Public Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall take out and maintain Insurance and Contractor's Protective Public Liability and Property Damage Liability Insurance in accordance with the contract terms in not less than the following amounts. General Liabilitv Property Damage Bodily Injury Combined Single Limit Each Person Each Occurrence Each Person Aggregate $1,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 $2,000,000 1.12 UTLITIES Water, light, heat and electric energy for construction purposes will be furnished by the Town of Watertown at the nearest existing service outlets of such characteristics as are in existence and in such amounts as can be made available without hampering the operations of the Town of Watertown. Wasteful use or other abuse of this privilege will be grounds for discontinuance. 1.13 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The Contractor shall take all precautions to safeguard the health and well-being of all workmen and all others rightfully on the Town of Watertown premises who may be affected by work done under this contract. He shall similarly safeguard Town of Watertown property. All safety laws and regulations of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, applicable to work performed under this contract, shall be adhered to. 1.14 STORAGE The Contractor shall confine his/her apparatus, the storage of materials, and the operations of his/her workmen, to the limits prescribed by the Town of Watertown and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with his materials. 1.15 POWER OF DEPARTMENT OR TOWN OF WATERTOWN REPRESENTATIVE The Town of Watertown shall have the power to reject all work or material which does not conform to this contract; to direct the application of additional work-force increased or diminished; and to decide questions,which arise between the parties,relative to the execution of the work. 1.16 INSPECTION Official representatives of the Town of Watertown shall have the right to inspect the workmanship and materials and all other aspects of the work, at any time. General Conditions 1-3 1.17 SALVAGE All salvageable materials, fixtures or equipment removed by the Contractor shall remain the property of the Town of Watertown and shall be removed to locations as designated by the representative,unless ownership is specifically designated herein as being the Contractor's. 1.18 CLEANING UP The Contractor shall, as directed by the Town of Watertown or Town of Watertown's Authorities, remove from the Town of Watertown property, at his own expense, all temporary structures, rubbish and waste materials,resulting from his operations. 1.19 ACCEPTANCE The work shall be inspected for acceptance by the Town of Watertown's representative promptly upon receipt of notice in writing that the work is ready for such inspection. 1.20 PAYMENT Payments will be made within thirty(30)days from receipt of invoice. 1.21 CHANGES IN WORK The Town of Watertown may order changes in the work within the scope of the contract,including but not limited to, changes in: (a) the plans and specifications; (b) in the method or manner of performance of the work;(c) in the Town's buildings, equipment materials, services or site; (d) in the schedule for performance of work. The Town of Watertown may direct the Contractor to perform any change order work and the Contractor shall immediately do any and all work required to effect the change in contract. Whenever a change in work is ordered,and said change will cause an equitable adjustment in the Contractor's cost, the Contractor may request an equitable adjustment in the contract price. A request for such an adjustment shall be in writing and shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Department before commencement of the pertinent work or as soon thereafter as possible. The Department and the Contractor shall by negotiation agree upon an equitable adjustment in the contract price before commencement of pertinent work or as soon as thereafter as possible. If no agreement is reached,the Contractor may appeal within thirty days as set forth in G.L. Chapter 149. 1.22 ADDENDA Questions during the bidding period,regarding the accompanying plans and/or specifications,shall be submitted in triplicate to the Town of Watertown Purchasing Department,at least eight(8)days before the bid opening. The Town of Watertown Purchasing Department will prepare addenda on or about the three days prior to the bid opening, containing interpretations of all questions raised, which in the opinion of the Town of Watertown Purchasing Department require interpretation.All bidders of record will receive the addenda by email or fax. General Conditions 1-4 1.23 NON-DISCRIMINATION ARTICLE During the performance of this contract, the Contractor, for himself/herself, his/her assignees and successors in interest(hereinafter referred to as the"Contractor"), agrees as follows: 1. In connection with performance of work: under this contract,the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religious creed, national origin, age, ancestry, sex, physical or mental handicap. The aforesaid provisions shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms or compensation; conditions or privileges or employment;and selection for training;including apprenticeship.The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the Massachusetts Commission against Discrimination setting forth the provisions of the fair employment practice law of the Commonwealth. 2. Compliance with Requirement: The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Governor's Code of Fair Practices dated July 20, 1970, and Chapter 151B as amended, of the non-discrimination laws of the Commonwealth which are herein incorporated by reference and made part of this contract. 3. Non-Discrimination: The Contractor, in the performance of all work after award, and prior to completion of the contract work, shall not discriminate on grounds of practices or in the selection or retention of sub-contractors, and in the procurement of materials and rental of equipment. 1.24 ANTI-BOYCOTT COVENANT The Contractor warrants,represents and agrees that during the time the contract is in effect,neither it nor any affiliated company, as hereinafter defined, participates in or cooperates with any international boycott, as defined in Section 999(b) (3) and (4) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, as amended, or engages in conduct declared to be unlawful by Section 2 of Chapter 151E, Massachusetts General Laws. If there shall be a breach in the warranty, representation and agreement contained in this paragraph,then without limiting such other rights as if may have,the Town of Watertown shall be entitled to rescind this contract. As used herein, affiliated company shall be any business entity of which at least 51% of the ownership interest of the Contractor, or which directly or indirectly owns at least 51%of the ownership interests of the Contractor. 1.25 EXECUTIVE ORDER NO. 195 The Governor or his designee,the secretary of Administration and Finance,and the State Auditor, or his designee, shall have the right at reasonable times and upon reasonable notice to examine the books, records, and other compilations of data of the Contractor(s) and Sub-Contractor(s) which pertain to the performance of the provisions and requirements of this proposed contract. 1.26 BID SECURITY The bid must be accompanied by a Bid Bond, or a Certified Check on, or a Treasurer's or Cashier's Check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the Town of Watertown, in the amount of five (5) percent of bid. No other form of bid security will be accepted. General Conditions 1-5 1.26 Bid Security Continued All such bid deposits,except those of the three lowest responsible and eligible bidders,will be returned within five (5) days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, after the opening of proposals thereof.All remaining bid deposits will be returned upon the execution of delivery of the performance bond and the payment bond,or if no award is made,upon the expiration of thirty (30) days after the opening of bids, therefore, unless forfeited by failure to obtain the aforementioned bond. 1.27 PERFORMANCE BOND A bond,with an approved surety company as surety, for the full amount of the contract,will be required for the faithful performance of the contract. The bond must be furnished within ten(10) working days after the date of receipt by the Contractor of the notification,by the Purchasing Department,of the award of the contract. In case of the failure of the bidder to furnish the bond within the said time,the Town may, at its option, determine that the bidder has abandoned the contract, and thereupon the proposal and acceptance shall be null and void. The bond shall remain in force&effect, for the full amount, for one (1)year from the date of acceptance of the work. 1.28 MATERIAL BOND A bond,with an approved surety company as surety,for 100% of the contract,will be required as security for payment of laborers,material-men and others. This bond must be furnished at the time the performance bond is, within ten(10) working days after the date of receipt by the Contractor of the notification by the Watertown Purchasing Department of award of the contract. This bond shall remain in force and effect for a period of 120 days from the date of acceptance of the work. (Chapter 149, Section 29 and Chapter 30, Section 39A of the General Laws). 1.29 PAYROLL RECORDS Department of Labor and Industries requires that employers submit weekly payroll records to the Town of Watertown for all employees who have worked on the project. Employers must preserve these records for three years. Forms will be provided with prevailing wage rate schedule. 1.30 OSHA REQUREMENTS CHAPTER 306 of the ACTS of 2004 The contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act and the Construction Safety Act of 1969, and Chapter 306 of the Acts of 2004 which are incorporated hereby by reference and all standard and regulations promulgated by the governmental and regulatory bodies responsible for administration thereof. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with such Acts, standards and regulations by its officers, agents, and employees, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, suppliers and materialman. All employees at the worksite shall have successfully completed a course in construction safety and health approved by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration that is at least 10 hours in duration at the time the employee begins work. General Conditions 1-6 1.30 OSHA REQUREMENTS CHAPTER 306 of the ACTS of 2004 continued The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall furnish documentation of successful completion of said course with the first certified payroll report for each employee. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply fully with all laws and regulations subject to M.G.L. Section 144 and Section 44F. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Town of Watertown from any and all fines, costs and expenses, including but not limited to reasonable attorney's fees, incurred by the Town of Watertown due to the Contractor's violation of such Acts, standards and/or regulations. Certificates of completion will be submitted along with first payment requisition and/or certified payroll. 1.31 TAX-EXEMPTION NUMBER The successful bidder will be provided with a tax-exempt number in accordance with the provisions of G.L.Chapter 64H,Section 6 for the purchase of materials and supplies to be used or incorporated in the performance of this contract for the Town of Watertown. END OF SECTION General Conditions 1-7 95.01 PROHIBITION OF NOISE EMISSIONS. (A) No person owning,leasing or controlling a source of sound shall willfully,negligently, or through failure to provide necessary equipment, service,or maintenance or to take necessary precautions cause, suffer, allow or permit unnecessary emissions from said source of sound that may cause noise. (B) Division(A)of this section shall pertain to,but shall not be limited to,prolonged unattended sounding of burglar alarms, construction and demolition equipment which characteristically emit sound but which may be fitted and accommodated with equipment such as enclosures to suppress sound or may be operated in a manner so as to suppress sound, suppressible and preventable industrial and commercial sources of sound, and other man-made sounds that cause noise. (C) All devices employed in construction or demolition shall be prohibited from use during the hours of: (1) 7:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. from Monday through Friday; (2) 7:00 p.m. on Fridays through 8:00 a.m. on Saturdays; and (3) 7:00 p.m. on Saturdays through 8:00 a.m. on Sundays. (Ord. 6,passed 9-13-1983; Am. Ord. 14,passed 3-12-1996) Penalty, see § 95.99 § 95.02 DEFINITIONS AND MEASUREMENTS OF NOISE. (A) The town hereby incorporates into and makes a part of this chapter the provisions of Chapter 310 Code of Massachusetts Regulations, Section 7.00 entitled Air Pollution Control Regulations. (B) These regulations shall govern the definitions,measurement and restriction of sources of noise emission. (C) For the purposes of this chapter, a CONDITION OF NOISE POLLUTION shall be a noise source which increases noise levels 10 dB or more above the background noise level. If the noise level is judged by ear to have a tonal sound, an increase of 5 dB above background noise level is sufficient to cause noise pollution. (Ord. 6,passed 9-13-1983) § 95.03 DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF TOWN DEPARTMENTS. (A) All town departments and agencies shall,to the fullest extent consistent with other laws, carry out their programs in such a manner as to further the policy of this chapter. (B) All town departments and agencies shall comply with Federal and State laws and regulations and the provisions and intent of this ordinance respecting the control and abatement of noise to the same extent that any person is subject to such laws and regulations. (Ord. 6,passed 9-13-1983) § 95.04 EXCEPTIONS. This chapter shall apply to the control of all sound originating within the limits of the Town of Watertown except the following: (A) The emission of sound for the purpose of alerting persons to the existence of an emergency or to the emission of sound in the performance of emergency work or in training exercises related to emergency activities. (B) Noncommercial public speaking and public assembly activities as guaranteed by state and federal constitutions. (C) Domestic equipment such as lawn mowers and power saws between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 9:00 P.M. (Ord. 6,passed 9-13-1983) § 95.05 ENFORCEMENT. The Board of Health shall be the primary enforcement agency of the terms of this chapter. In addition, any Police Department or Fire Department official or building inspector or their designee, acting within their jurisdictional area,is authorized to enforce this chapter. (Ord. 6,passed 9-13-1983) F § 95.99 PENALTY. (A) Any person who violates any provision of this chapter,if convicted, shall be fined no less than $50 nor more than$100 for the first offense and not less than$200 nor more than$500 for each succeeding offense. (B) Each subsequent day or part thereof of violation of this chapter,whether the violation be continuous or intermittent, shall be construed as a separate and succeeding offense. (Ord. 6,passed 9-13-1983) Disclaimer: This Code of Ordinances and/or any other documents that appear on this site may not reflect the most current legislation adopted by the Municipality.American Legal Publishing Corporation provides these documents for informational purposes only.These documents should not be relied upon as the definitive authority for local legislation.Additionally,the formatting and pagination of the posted documents varies from the formatting and pagination of the official copy.The official printed copy of a Code of Ordinances should be consulted prior to any action being taken. For further information regarding the official version of any of this Code of Ordinances or other documents posted on this site, please contact the Municipality directly or contact American Legal Publishing toll-free at 800-445-5588. TOWN OF WATERTOWN, MASSACHUSETTS AGREEMENT FOR THIS AGREEMENT made this day of by and between the Town of Watertown, a municipal corporation duly organized under the laws of Massachusetts and having a usual place of business at 149 Main Street, Watertown, MA,02472, acting by and through its Town Manager, hereinafter referred to as the "Town", and a Massachusetts limited corporation having a usual place of business at hereinafter referred to as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: Whereas, the Town solicited public bids for Watertown Middle School Boys Locker Room Renovation "the Project"; and WHEREAS, the Contractor submitted a bid in response to said solicitation, and the Town has awarded the contract therefor to the Contractor. NOW, THEREFORE, the Town and the Contractor agree as follows: 1. Contract Documents. The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, the purchase description, if any, the Invitation for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Scope of Services or Specification, bid submitted by the Contractor, including any negotiated modifications to the Plan of Services, and addendums. The Contract Documents constitute the entire Agreement between the parties concerning the work, and all are as fully a part of this Agreement as if attached hereto. In the event of a conflict between any of the Contract Documents, the document most favorable to the Town, in its sole determination, shall prevail. 2. The Work. The Work consists of , as more fully described in the bid form as defined above. 3. Term of Contract. This Agreement shall be in effect from and shall expire on , unless terminated earlier pursuant to the terms hereof. 4. Compensation. A. The Town shall pay, as full compensation for items and/or services furnished and delivered in carrying out this Agreement. Total Price $ , as set forth in more detail in the Contract Documents. B. The acceptance by the Contractor of final payment for items and/or services provided shall be deemed a release of the Town from any and all claims and liabilities under this Agreement. C. Neither the Town's review, approval or acceptance of, nor payment for any of the items and/or services provided shall be construed to operate as a waiver of any rights of the Town under the Agreement or any cause of action arising out of the performance of the Agreement. 5. Payment of Compensation. The Town shall make payments as follows: within 30 days of approved pav requisition with original certified pavroll. 6. Payment and Performance Bonds. The contractor shall provide a Performance Bond in amount of 100% of the contract value, and a Payment Bond in the amount of 100% of the contract value within 10 days of the contract award to stay in effect for the full term of the contract. 7. Liability of the Town. The Town's liability hereunder shall be to make all payments when they shall become due, and the Town shall be under no further obligation or liability. Nothing in this Agreement shall be construed to render the Town or any elected or appointed official or employee of the Town, or their successors in office, personally liable for any obligation under this Agreement. 8. Indemnification. The Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold the Town harmless from and against any and all claims, demands, liabilities, actions, causes of actions, costs and expenses, including attorney's fees, arising out of the Contractor's breach of this Agreement or the negligence or willful misconduct of the Contractor, or the Contractor's agents or employees. 9. Insurance. A. the Contractor shall obtain and maintain during the term of this Agreement the insurance coverage in companies licensed to do business in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, and acceptable to the Town, as set out in the Invitation for Bids, or in Attachment A hereto. B. All policies shall identify the Town as an additional insured(except Workers' Compensation) and shall provide that the Town shall receive written notification at least 30 days prior to the effective date of any amendment or cancellation. Certificates evidencing all such coverages shall be provided to the Town upon the execution of this Agreement, and at least ten(10) days prior to the renewal of any such coverage. Each such certificate shall specifically refer to this Agreement and shall state that such insurance is as required by this Agreement. Failure to provide or to continue in force such insurance shall be deemed a material breach of this Agreement and shall be grounds for immediate termination. 10. Assignment. The Contractor shall not assign, sublet or otherwise transfer this Agreement, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of the Town, and shall not assign any of the moneys payable under this Agreement, except by and with the written consent of the Town. 11. Termination. A. Termination for Cause. If at any time during the term of this Agreement the Town determines that the Contractor has breached the terms of this Agreement by negligently or incompetently performing the work, or any part thereof, or by failing to perform the work in a timely fashion, or by failing to perform the work to the satisfaction of the Town, or by not complying with the direction of the Town or its agents, or by otherwise failing to perform this Agreement in accordance with all of its terms and provisions, the Town shall notify the Contractor in writing stating therein the nature of the alleged breach and directing the Contractor to cure such breach within ten (10) days. The Contractor specifically agrees that it shall indemnify and hold the Town harmless from any loss, damage, cost, charge, expense or claim arising out of our resulting from such breach regardless of its knowledge or authorization of the actions resulting in the breach. If the Contractor fails to cure said breach within ten(10) days, the Town may, at its election at any time after the expiration of said ten (10) days, terminate this Agreement by giving written notice thereof to the Contractor specifying the effective date of the termination. Upon receipt of said notice, the Contractor shall cease to incur additional expenses in connection with this Agreement. Upon the date specified in said notice, this Agreement shall terminate. Such termination shall not prejudice or waive any rights or action which the Town may have against the Contractor up to the date of such termination, and the Contractor shall be liable to the Town for any amount which it may be required to pay in excess of the compensation provided herein in order to complete the work specified herein in a timely manner. Upon such termination, the Contractor shall be entitled to compensation for all satisfactory work completed prior to the termination date, as determined by the Town. B. Termination for Convenience. The Town may terminate this Agreement at any time for convenience by providing the Contractor written notice specifying therein the termination date which shall not be sooner than ten days from the issuance of said notice. Upon receipt of said notice, the Contractor shall cease to incur additional expenses in connection with this Agreement. Upon such termination, the Contractor shall be entitled to compensation for all satisfactory work completed prior to the termination date, as determined by the Town, such payment not to exceed the fair value of the services provided hereunder. 12. Inspection and Reports. The Town shall have the right at any time to inspect the work of the Contractor, including the right to enter upon any property owned or occupied by Contractor, whether situated within or beyond the limits of the Town. Whenever requested, Contractor shall immediately furnish to the Town full and complete written reports of its operation under this Agreement in such detail and with such information as the Town may request. 13. Rovalties and Patents: The Contractor shall pay all applicable royalties and license fees. In addition, the Contractor hereby represents that it is duly authorized to use any process or other intellectual property rights held by third parties in the performance of this Agreement, it shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or other intellectual property rights and shall indemnify and hold the Town harmless from loss on account thereof. 14. Successor and Assigns. This Agreement is binding upon the parties hereto, their successors, assigns and legal representatives. Neither the Town nor the Contractor shall assign or transfer any interest in the Agreement without the written consent of the other. Notwithstanding the approval of any assignment by the Town pursuant to this paragraph, the Contractor shall remain liable for the full performance of the terms of this Contract. 15. Compliance with Laws. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State and local laws, rules, regulations and orders applicable to the work provided pursuant to this Agreement, such provisions being incorporated herein by reference, and shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary licenses, permits, and approvals required for the performance of such work. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Town harmless for and against any and all fines, penalties or monetary liabilities incurred by the Town as a result of the failure of the Contractor to comply with the previous sentence. 16. Notice. Any and all notices, or other communications required or permitted under this Agreement, shall be in writing and delivered by hand or mailed postage prepaid, return receipt requested, by registered or certified mail or by other reputable delivery service, to the parties at the addresses set forth on Page 1 or furnished from time to time in writing hereafter by one party to the other party. Any such notice or correspondence shall be deemed given when so delivered by hand, if so mailed, when deposited with the U.S. Postal Service or, if sent by private overnight or other delivery service, when deposited with such delivery service. 17. Severability. If any term or condition of this Agreement or any application thereof shall to any extent be held invalid, illegal or unenforceable by the court of competent jurisdiction, the validity, legality, and enforceability of the remaining terms and conditions of this Agreement shall not be deemed affected thereby unless one or both parties would be substantially or materially prejudiced. 18. Governing Law. This Agreement shall be governed by, construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and the Contractor submits to the jurisdiction of any of its appropriate courts for the adjudication of disputes arising out of this Agreement. 19. Entire Agreement. This Agreement, including all documents incorporated herein by reference, constitutes the entire integrated agreement between the parties with respect to the matters described. This Agreement supersedes all prior agreements, negotiations and representations, either written or oral, and it shall not be modified or amended except by a written document executed by the parties hereto. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement on the day and year first written above. I certify that an appropriation TOWN OF WATERTOWN is available in the amount of this Contract. By: Town Auditor Town Manager (Contractor) Approved as to Form: Town Attorney By: Name: (Type or Print) Title: Watertown Middle School — Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 00 73 43 MINIMUM WAGE RATES MINIMUM WAGE RATES TO BE ORDERED AND INSERTED INTO THIS DOCUMENT CLOSER TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION MINIMUM WAGE RATES Gienapp Architects 00 73 43 - 1 of 2 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA This Page is Intentionally Left Blank. MINIMUM WAGE RATES Gienapp Architects 00 73 43 - 2 Of 2 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT CONDITIONS SPECIFICALLY REQUIRED BY LAW A. This Contract is subject to all State and local laws, and all amendments thereto, and where any requirements contained herein do not conform to such statutes governing that construction work of this Contract, the statutes shall govern. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Work under this Contract 2. Work to be performed by Owner 3. Cutting, coring, and patching 4. Examination of Site and Documents 5. Separate Contracts 6. Owner's use of premises 7. Tests and inspections 8. Materials and workmanship 9. Times for completion 10. Wage rates 11. Building permit 12. Insurance 13. Project closeout 14. Guarantees 15. Operations and maintenance data 16. Final inspections 17. Painting 1.03 WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT A. The work to be performed under this Contract includes furnishing all, labor, equipment, appliances and materials and performing all work shown on the contract documents labeled as Watertown Middle School Girls Locker Room, Watertown, MA. B. The work described by: 1. These Specifications, as enumerated in the "Table of Contents". 2. Plans numbered: General Proiect Information T-1 Title Sheet T-2 Code Analysis Demolition D100 Demolition Plans Architectural Al 00 Girls Locker Room Floor Plan A200 Interior Elevations and Plan Details A300 Interior Elevations and Details A600 Partition and Finish Schedules Fire Protection F001 Fire Protection FA100 Fire Alarm Riser Diagram F100 Fire Protection Floor Plans SUMMARY OF WORK Gienapp Design 01 11 00 - 1 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA Plumbing P001 Plumbing Legend, Notes and Schedule PD100 Plumbing Demo Plans P100 Plumbing Floor Plan Mechanical H001 HVAC Legend and Specifications H002 HVAC Schedules H003 HVAC Details H100 HVAC Floor Plans Electrical E001 Electrical Legend, Notes and Specifications E002 Electrical Fixture Schedule and Details ED100 Electrical Demolition Plan E100 Electrical Lighting and Power Plans 3. Addenda issued during the bidding period which are hereby made a part of the Specifications. 4. The printed form of Contract. 1.04 WORK TO BE PERFORMED BY OWNER A. Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at the Project site. Those operations will be substantially complete before the work under this Contract begins. 1. Not Applicable 1.05 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING A. All necessary cutting, coring, drilling, grouting, and patching to fit together properly all the parts of the work shall be done by the General Contractor, except as may be specifically noted otherwise under any particular sub-trade section of the specifications, or work noted to be performed by the Owner. B. Drilling of concrete may only occur during the following times: 7:00 AM to 8:30 AM and 5:00 PM to the end of the day per Town ordinances. 1.06 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS A. All bidders shall visit the site and examine all Contract Documents before submitting a bid. Inspect and be thoroughly familiar with conditions under which work will be carried out. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for errors,omissions and/or charges for extra work arising from General or Subcontractor's failure to familiarize themselves with Contract Documents or existing conditions. By submitting a bid, the bidder agrees and warrants that he has examined the site and the Construction Documents and that he is familiar with the conditions and requirements of both. 1.07 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. The Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Project with its own forces and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other work on the premises under these or similar Conditions of the Contract. 1.08 WORK RESTRICTIONS/SCHOOL TESTING DATES A. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits/area of work indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. B. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. SUMMARY OF WORK Gienapp Design 01 11 00 - 2 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1. The Contractor shall schedule and execute all disruptive work (noisy, odorous etc.) restricted to after school hours only. School is scheduled as 8:30AM-3:00 PM weekdays. 2. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 3. The Contractor assumes the responsibility of scheduling disruptive work during after- school hours as outlined above. The Contractor shall include any and all primetime (overtime) labor expenses incurred as part of the General Project Bid. Primetime (overtime) expenses for work of the Contract will not be subject to the expense of the Owner following the project start date. 4. No work is to be performed during the following dates (2020) as MCAS testing will occur: a. April 15-April17t" b. April 27t"-April29t" c. May 13t"-May 26t" C. Spring 19' School Vacation is scheduled for April 20, 2020 - April 24, 2020, disruptive work is permitted during this time. D. The final day of school is scheduled for June 22, 2020 (pending snow days.) However, summer classes will take place and scheduling of disruptive work is still applicable during this time. 1.09 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. The Contractor shall make such tests and inspections of his workmanship and materials as may be required by the Building Code, State or municipal laws, or as called for under the various SECTIONS of the Specifications. 1.10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials required for the performance of this Contract shall be new and of best quality of kinds specified, all subject to the approval of the Architect. Materials shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruction unless otherwise specified. Upon request of the Architect to the General Contractor, the manufacturer's representative shall go to the site and instruct the mechanics in the use of the materials or shall supervise their use. All work shall be done by mechanics skilled in their trade and experienced in performing improvements to historical properties of similar construction. B. After signing of the Contract, the substitution will not be permitted of any materials or method of construction, unless otherwise approved by the Architect. Should the specified materials or construction not be available through reasons beyond the control of the General Contractor, the question shall be immediately referred to the Architect for decision before proceeding with the work. 1.11 TIMES FOR COMPLETION A. It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and the time for completion, as specified in the Contact for the work to be done there under are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this Contract, and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this Contract shall be commenced by the date specified therein. B. The Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will ensure full completion thereof within the time specified. C. Work shall commence once a Notice to Proceed is issued, which is anticipated to be shortly after the Town Council meetings noted below. Work must adhere to the following restrictions: 1. The project is subject to two town council meeting votes prior to the issue of an award letter; the first meeting is anticipated for 2/25/20, the second on 3/10/20. 2. Work shall reach Substantial Completion on or before 105 days after the Notice to Proceed. SUMMARY OF WORK Gienapp Design 01 11 00 - 3 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3. All billing is to be submitted prior to June 301h 2020. 4. Work shall reach Final Completion within 14 calendar days after Substantial Completion. 1.12 WAGE RATES A. Minimum wage rates are required for this project. A copy of the Prevailing Wage Rates is included in this Project Manual. 1.13 BUILDING PERMIT A. The Contractor shall obtain all permits required for the work.All permit fees payable to the Town of Watertown shall be waived. 1.14 DISTURBANCE OF EXISTING LEAD BASED PAINT A. It is noted for informational purposes that existing surfaces may have been previously painted with lead-based paint. B. The Contractor and all Sub-Contractors performing work of this contract which disturbs surfaces with lead-based paint, shall comply with, Federal OSHA regulations for worker right-to-know, worker protection and exposure monitoring located in 29 CFR 1926.62. 1.15 INSURANCE A. The Contractor shall provide insurance coverage that shall include all major divisions of coverage, as stipulated in the Invitation to Bid. 1.16 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Before the final inspection, areas where construction work has been performed, the immediate surrounding areas, temporary offices, and toilets shall be cleared of all rubbish and thoroughly cleaned by the General Contractor. All construction facilities, debris, and rubbish shall be removed from the Owner's property and legally disposed. All finished surfaces in the areas set forth above shall be swept, dusted, washed, and polished. This includes cleaning of the work of all finished trades where needed whether or not cleaning for such trades is included in their respective SECTIONS. 1.17 GUARANTEES A. The work under this contract, except as expressly excluded, and all of its subcontractors, severally and collectively whether herein stipulated in each case or not, shall be guaranteed against faulty workmanship and/or material for a term of one year from date of acceptance of the work. The provisions of the guarantee and/or guarantees shall be incumbent on all parties of the work, including the General Contractor, each Subcontractor, all material supply houses and all manufacturers whose products and/or equipment is incorporated into the building. 1.18 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. At least two (2) weeks prior to the time of turning over this contract to the Owner for use and occupancy or substantial completion, the Contractor shall secure and deliver two (2) hard copies and one (1) electronic PDF on a thumb drive of complete indexed files containing approved operating and maintenance manuals, shop drawings, and other data. 1.19 FINAL INSPECTIONS A. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the work, using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, and sequences and for coordinating all portions of the work under the Contract. B. The Contractor shall carefully check his own work and that of Subcontractors as the work is being performed. Unsatisfactory work shall be corrected immediately. C. When the Contractor determines that he is substantially complete, the Contractor will prepare a punch list and provide it to the Architect, who will add any other punch list items. SUMMARY OF WORK Gienapp Design 01 11 00 -4 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA D. The Contractor shall correct all `punch list' items or shall cause the correction of the "punch list" items within 14 (fourteen)calendar days. The time frame for the completion of the"punch list" items shall not exceed the completion date of the contract. 1.20 PAINTING A. The General Contractor is responsible for painting any and all items identified in the electrical drawings and specifications as "painted", "paint", or"requires painting". B. Paint shall satisfy the requirements of the trade sections for which they are included. END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF WORK Gienapp Design 01 11 00 - 5 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA This Page Intentionally Left Blank SUMMARY OF WORK Gienapp Design 01 11 00 - 6 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES, AND ADDITIONAL REQUIRED SUBMITTALS A. Related Documents 1. Consult the individual Sections of the Specifications for the specific submittals required under those Sections and for further details and descriptions of the requirements. B. General Procedure for Submittal 1. The Contractor shall transmit each submittal to the Architect sufficiently in advance of performing related work or other applicable activities, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing times, including disapproval and resubmittal (if required). 2. On the transmittal, or on a separate sheet attached to the transmittal, the Contractor shall direct attention to any deviations including minor limitations and variations, from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Deviation shall be highlighted on the submittals. 3. All transmittals shall contain at least the following information: a) Name of the project. b) Project address c) Name of Contractor d) Name of Sub-Contractor(if applicable) e) Specification section and paragraph reference f) Unique identification number indicating the submittal number g) Stamp or signature confirming Contractor review and approval 4. All costs for printing, preparing, packaging, submitting, resubmitting and mailing or delivering submittals specified in this Section shall be included in the Contractor's Sum. C. Architect's Action 1. The Architect will review the Contractor's submittal and return them with one of the following actions recorded thereon by appropriate markings: Unrestricted Release, proceed provided it complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Acceptance of the work will depend upon that compliance. Restricted Release, "Reviewed - Make corrections noted", "Reviewed -Note markings/comments attached," the work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with the Architect's notations or corrections on the submittal, and complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Acceptance of the work will depend upon these compliances. Returned for Resubmittal. D. Submission of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 1. Shop Drawings shall be complete, give all information necessary or requested in the individual Sections of the Specifications, and also show adjoining work and details of connection thereto. Shop Drawings shall be for whole systems. Partial submissions will not be accepted. 2. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect three legible, reproducible copies. Each submittal shall be accompanied by transmittal notice. E. Submission of Samples: Unless otherwise specified in the individual Section, the Contractor shall Gienapp Architects 013300- Page 1 of 2 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA submit two specimens of each sample and Samples shall be of adequate size to permit proper evaluation of materials. 1. Samples of items of interior colors shall be submitted all at once to permit a coordinated selection of colors and finishes. 2. Samples that can be conveniently mailed shall be sent directly to the Architect. All other Samples shall be delivered to the job site. 1.02 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of all drawings, specifications, addenda, change orders and other modifications, in good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and approved shop drawings, product data and samples. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to him for the Owner upon completion of the work 1.03 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall submit within fifteen (15) days of the award of the Contract a Progress Schedule in the form of a Bar. The Progress Schedule shall be updated every two (2)weeks. B. At least 10 working days prior to the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a progress schedule. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Prior to the first request for payment the Contractor shall submit to the Architect and the Owner a Schedule of Values of the various portion of the work including quantities when requested, aggregating the total contract sum and divided so as to facilitate payments for work under each SECTION. The Schedule shall be prepared in such form as specified or as; the Architect or the Owner may approve, and it shall include data to substantiate its accuracy. Each item in the Schedule of Values shall be used as a basis for review and approval of the Contractor's requests for payment. 1.05 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION ('RFI') A. The Contractor may submit Requests for Information to the Architect to help facilitate the Contractor's performance of the Contract. Prior to submitting each Request for Information, the Contractor shall first carefully study and compare the Contract Documents, field condition, other Owner provided information, Contractor prepared Coordination Drawings, and prior Project correspondence and documentation to determine that the information to be requested is not reasonably obtainable from such sources. PART 2 - PRODUCT (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Gienapp Architects 013300- Page 2 of 2 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 TEMPORARY WATER A. The Owner will make existing water sources in and around the building available for construction without charge. Any hoses and connections from service lines either outside or within the building, necessary for the use of the Contractor shall be installed, protected and maintained at the expense of the Contractor. Use of the water may be discontinued by the Owner if, in the opinion of the Owner, it is wastefully used. B. The Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of drinking water from approved sources of acceptable quality, satisfactorily cooled, for his employees and those of his Subcontractors. 1.02 WEATHER PROTECTION A. It is the intent of these specifications to require the Contractor to provide temporary enclosures and/or heat to maintain conditions necessary for the work. "Weather Protection" shall mean the temporary protection of that work adversely affected by moisture, wind and cold, by covering, enclosing and/or heating. This protection shall provide adequate working areas. Installation of weather protection and heating devices shall comply with all safety regulations including provisions for adequate ventilation and fire protection devices. Heating devices, which may cause damage to finish surface, shall not be used. B. The Contractor shall provide adequate weather protection at any time window and/or doors are removed from the building. C. At no location shall the building be left without a permanent door, during the overnight or closed hours. 1.03 TEMPORARY POWER A. The Owner will make existing electrical power sources in and around the building available for construction without charge. The Contractor and all Subcontractors, individually, shall furnish all extension cords, sockets, motors, and accessories required for their work. B. Any temporary wiring of a special nature shall be paid for by the Contractor requiring same. Any power that needs to be cut or equipment that needs to be disconnected will be done by a licensed electrician and eventually reconnected in order to accomplish or complete the work of this contract. 1.04 HOISTING EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY A. All hoisting equipment and machinery required for the proper and expeditious prosecution and progress of the work shall be furnished, installed, operated, and maintained in safe condition by the Contractor. 1.05 STAGING A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain in safe condition, and remove all scaffolds, staging as required for the execution of the Work. B. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall furnish, install, maintain, and remove all temporary ramps, stairs, ladders and similar items as required for the execution of the Work. 1.06 BARRIERS A. Barriers, Enclosures and Fences 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary fencing or barricades around the construction as may be necessary to assure the safety of all persons, authorized or Gienapp Architects 015000 - Page 1 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA unauthorized. Temporary fencing shall be removed before final completion and as soon as no longer required. B. Guard Rails 1. Furnish and maintain all necessary guard rails, barriers and the like as required for safety of personnel in the building, on the site, and public. 2. All such safety barriers shall be removed upon completion of this contract. Should the work be suspended, such safety barriers shall remain in place, and become the property of the Owner. 1.07 SECURITY A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all security precautions necessary, in the Contractor's opinion, to insure adequate protection of his and the Owner's interests including the installation of temporary glazing. B. See also WEATHER PROTECTION 1.02 above. 1.08 SPECIAL CONTROLS A. Dust controls should effectively seal off areas to maintain a clean and healthy environment in accordance with all applicable codes and standards. 1.09 TRAFFIC REGULATIONS A. Staging areas are limited to on-site areas. Contactor and his personnel shall park on-site to the extent available. 1.10 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS A. Debris shall not be permitted to accumulate and the work shall at all times be kept satisfactorily clean. Immediately after unpacking, all packing materials, case lumber, excelsior, wrapping, or other rubbish, flammable or otherwise, shall be collected and removed from the building and premises. 1.11 TEMPORARY OFFICES A. The Contractor shall not be required to have an office on site. However, there shall be an operable telephone on the site at all times there are workers on site (with number provided to the Owner and Architect). 1.12 TEMPORARY TOILETS A. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1.13 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. B. Maintain all required egresses at all times the building is occupied. C. Provide temporary weather tight enclosures for openings in exterior walls when and as required to protect the Work form damage by inclement weather. D. Roof surfaces and waterproofed surfaces shall not be subjected to traffic nor shall they be used for storage of materials. Where some activity must take place in order to carry out the work, adequate protection shall be provided. 1.14 FIRE PROTECTION AND PREVENTION Gienapp Architects 015000 - Page 2 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA A. Provide and maintain fire protection in form of barrels of water with buckets, fire bucket tanks, fire extinguishers, or other effective means of fire extinguishment, ready for instant use, distributed around the project and in and about temporary structures during construction of work. B. At the end of each work week, thoroughly clean the premises of rubbish and debris of any nature, and remove from the premises. C. No open fires will be permitted in or about premises. 1.15 NOISE AND POLLUTION CONTROL A. All work performed under the Contract shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 11, Section 31 C and Section 142D of the General Laws, and Rules and Regulations adopted thereto by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Department of Public Health and the Laws of the Town. END OF SECTION Gienapp Architects 015000 - Page 3 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Gienapp Architects 015000 - Page 4 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 02 4119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 3. Clearing of debris from existing areaways. B. Items To Be Installed Only: Not Applicable. C. Items To Be Furnished Only: Not Applicable. D. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 01 7300 "Execution"for cutting and patching procedures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. E. Dismantle:To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 2. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work,with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 3. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 4. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 5. Use of elevator and stairs. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Gienapp Architects 02 4119 - Page 1 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. C. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 7. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. Furniture, which will be actively relocated as the work progresses. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 8. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 9. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. B. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Gienapp Architects 02 4119 - Page 2 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 10. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 11. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 12. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 13. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 14. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 72 hours after flame-cutting operations. 15. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 16. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 17. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 18. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 19. Clean salvaged items. 20. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 21. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 22. Transport items to Owner's storage area off-site designated by Owner. 23. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 24. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 25. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 26. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 27. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. B. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Gienapp Architects 02 4119 - Page 3 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 28. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 29. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 30. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Gienapp Architects 02 4119 - Page 4 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 033000 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the furnishing and installation of the following items and materials: 1. Cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Section includes the furnishing only of the following items and materials: None. C. Section includes the installation only of the following items and materials: None. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready- mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1.5 STAGIING A. Staging up to 8 feet above the floor shall be provided by this section. B. Staging higher than 8 feet above the floor shall be provided by the General Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. Comply with the following sections of ACI 301 (ACI 301 M) unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: Gienapp Architects MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1. "General Requirements." 2. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 3. "Concrete Mixtures." 4. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing." B. Comply with ACI 117 (ACI 117M). 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120. C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330/C 330M, 1-inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M. E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 2.4 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long. Gienapp Architects MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder: Plastic sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class A or B. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth or cotton mats. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301 M). B. Normal-Weight Concrete: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. 4. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm) plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301 (ACI 301 M). Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floor slabs to exceed 3 percent. C. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m). 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. 1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m). 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure. Gienapp Architects MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301 M)for placing concrete. B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301 M). C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301 M). 3.4 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface. 1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. C. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system. 3.5 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 (ACI 301 M) for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. Gienapp Architects MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 -4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301 (ACI 301 M). 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. END OF SECTION 033053 Gienapp Architects MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA This Page is Intentionally Left Blank. Gienapp Architects MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 05 5000 MISCELLANEOUS METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the furnishing and installation of the following items and materials: 1. Steel angles 2. B. Section includes the furnishing only of the following items and materials: 1. None. C. Section includes the installation only of the following items and materials: 1. None. D. Related Requirements: 1. Section 04 2000 "Unit Masonry"for patching CMU walls. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Prefabricated building columns. 3. Metal nosings and treads. 4. Paint products. 5. Grout. Gienapp Design METAL 2114118 FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel angles and lintels 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. C. Welding certificates. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements:Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 STAGING A. All staging for the work of this section, up to 8feet in height, shall be furnished and installed by this section. B. All staging over 8 feet in height shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. Gienapp Design METAL 2114118 FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth,flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. D. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal- weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa). 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Gienapp Design METAL 2114118 FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 2.5 FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Including but not limited to welded 1-1/2"x1-1/2" angles at air conditioners. and steel angles at floor infill. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. Gienapp Design METAL 2114118 FABRICATIONS 055000 -4 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb,true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts,through bolts, lag screws,wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and support angles to comply with requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for floor infill securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure. C. Weld support angles in place for floor infill areas. D. Weld steel angles to construct frame to support window air conditioners. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm)dry film thickness. Gienapp Design METAL 2114118 FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA B. Touchup Painting: Clean and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 055000 Gienapp Design METAL 2114118 FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension. C. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. ROUGH CARPENTRY Gienapp Architects 06 1000 - Page 1 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less; no limit for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. C. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test- response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire- retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY Gienapp Architects 06 1000 - Page 2 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Utility shelving. B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir(south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. C. Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4-inch-thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. D. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. ROUGH CARPENTRY Gienapp Architects 06 1000 - Page 3 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. J. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX)from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet , apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY Gienapp Architects 06 1000 - Page 4 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Mineral wool blankets for insulation of all interior partitions. 2. Additional items indicated on the drawings as '07 2100' or'by 07 2100'. B. Items To Be Installed Only: Not Applicable. C. Items To Be Furnished Only: Furnish the following items for installation by the designated Sections: 1. Mineral Fiber Blankets (SAFB) in metal-framed assemblies to Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board Assemblies". D. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Division 09 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for insulation in metal -framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Reinforced-Foil Faced "SAFB": ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company. 2.2 SPRAY POLYURETHAN FOAM INSULATION A. Closed-Cell Polyurethane Low Expanding Foam Insulation: ASTM E 283, with maximum flame spread and smoke-developed indexes of 10 and 20, respectively, per ASTM E 84 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). C. Gaco Western Inc. d. Volatile Free, Inc. 2. Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F. THERMAL INSULATION Gienapp Architects 07 2100 - Page 1 of 2 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. E. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits,wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Mineral Wool Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION Gienapp Architects 07 2100 - Page 2 of 2 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 07 8413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated construction, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 2. Through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through vertical and horizontal construction separating rooms even if the existing assembly is not fire rated. B. Items To Be Installed Only: Not Applicable. C. Items To Be Furnished Only: Not Applicable. D. Related Work: The following items are not included in this Section and will be performed under the designated Sections: 1. Firestopping of all penetrations of conduits, wiring, piping, ductwork, and other items penetrating partitions shall be provided by the Trade Sections (Division 22 "Plumbing", Division 23 "HVAC", and Division 26 "Electrical"). Firestopping provided by those sections shall comply with the requirements of this Section. 2. Division 07 "Joint Sealants"for standard joint sealers. 3. Division 09 "Gypsum Board Assemblies"for gypsum assemblies. 4. Division 22 "Plumbing"for piping penetrations. 5. Division 23 "HVAC"for duct and piping penetrations. 6. Division 26 "Electrical"for cable and conduit penetrations. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors,"or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its"Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Gienapp Architects 07 8413 - Page 1 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. C. Tremco, Inc. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated or 1 hour, whichever is higher. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. 3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq.ft. of penetration opening at and no more than 50-cfm cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Gienapp Architects 07 8413 - Page 2 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA B. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. C. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. D. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes. 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Gienapp Architects 07 8413 - Page 3 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. B. UL-CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS CONCRETE OR UL-CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS PART 4 -CONCRETE BLOCK WALLS FLOORS TYPE OF F- HILTI 3M BIO-FIRE TYPE OF F- HILTI 3M BIO-FIRE PENETRANT RATING PENETRA RATING HR NT CIRCULAR 1 FA 0006, CAJ CAJ 0056 CIRCULAR 1 CAJ 0055, CAJ 0009 CAJ 0056 BLANK CAJ 0070 0009 BLANK CAJ 0070 OPENINGS OPENING S 2 FA 0006, CAJ CAJ 0056 2 CAJ 0055, CAJ 0009 CAJ 0056 CAJ 0070 0009 CAJ 0070 3 CAJ 0055 CAJ CAJ 0056 3 CAJ 0055 CAJ 0009 CAJ 0056 0009 SINGLE 1 CAJ 1226, CAJ CAJ 1264 SINGLE 1 CAJ 1226, CAJ 1058 CAJ 1264 METAL PIPES CAJ 1278, 1058 METAL CAJ 1278, OR CONDUIT FA 1017 PIPES OR CONDUIT 2 CAJ 1226, CAJ CAJ 1264 2 CAJ 1226, CAJ 1058 CAJ 1264 CAJ 1278, 1058 CAJ 1278, FA 1017 3 CAJ 1226, CAJ CAJ 1264 3 CAJ 1226, CAJ 1058 CAJ 1264 CAJ 1278, 1058 CAJ 1278, FA 1017 4 CAJ 8095, CAJ N/A 4 CAJ 8095, CAJ 1044 WJ 1064 CBJ 1034 1044 CBJ 1034, WJ 1042 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Gienapp Architects 07 8413 - Page 4 of 8 Watertown Middle School- Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SINGLE NON- 1 CAJ 2109, CAJ CAJ 2131 SINGLE 1 CAJ 2109, CAJ 2189, CAJ 2131 METALLIC CAJ 2168, 2189, NOW WJ 2108, CAJ 2117, PIPE OR FA 2054, CAJ METALLIC WJ 2121 CAJ 2027 CONDUIT(I.E. FA 2067 2117, PIPE OR PVC, CPVC, CAJ CONDUIT ABS, ENT) 2027 (I.E. PVC, CPVC, ABS, ENT) 2 CAJ 2109, CAJ CAJ 2131 2 CAJ 2109, CAJ 2189, CAJ2131 CAJ 2168, 2189, WJ 2108, CAJ 2117, FA 2054, CAJ WJ 2121 CAJ 2027 FA 2067 2117 3 CAJ 2109, CAJ CAJ 2152 3 CAJ 2109, CAJ 2005, CAJ2152 CAJ 2168, 2005, CAJ 2168, CAJ 2117, FA 2054, CAJ WJ 2091 CAJ 2027 2117 4 N/A* N/A* N/A 4 WJ 2091 N/A* N/A SINGLE OR 1 FA 3007, CAJ CAJ 3103 SINGLE 1 CAJ 3095, CAJ 3021 WJ 3071 BUNDLED CAJ 3095, 3021 OR WJ 3060 CABLES BUNDLED WJ 3074 CABLES 2 FA 3007, CAJ CAJ 3103 2 CAJ 3095, CAJ 3021 WJ 3071 CAJ 3095, 3021 WJ 3060 WJ 3074 3 FA 3007, CAJ CAJ 3103 3 CAJ 3095, CAJ 3030 CAJ 3103 CAJ 3095, 3030 WJ 3050 4 N/A* N/A* N/A 4 WJ 3050 N/A* N/A CABLE TRAY 1 CAJ 4034, CAJ CAJ 4048 CABLE 1 CAJ 4034, CAJ 4003 CAJ 4048 CAJ 4054, 4003 TRAY CAJ 4054, CAJ 4017 WJ 4016, 2 CAJ 4034, CAJ CAJ 4048 2 CAJ 4034, CAJ 4003 CAJ 4048 CAJ 4054, 4003 CAJ 4054, CAJ 4017 WJ 4016, 3 CAJ 4034, CAJ CAJ 4048 3 CAJ 4034, CAJ 4003 CAJ 4048 CAJ 4017 4003 WJ 8007 4 N/A* N/A* N/A 4 WJ 8007 N/A* N/A SINGLE 1 FA 5016, CAJ CAJ 5082 SINGLE 1 CAJ 5090, CAJ 5080, CAJ 5082 INSULATED FA 5017 5080, INSULATE CAJ 5091, CAJ 5024, PIPES CAJ 5090, CAJ D PIPES WJ 5042 CAJ 5017 CAJ 5091, 5024, CAJ 5017 2 FA 5016, CAJ CAJ 5082 2 CAJ 5090, CAJ 5080, CAJ 5082 FA 5017 5080, CAJ 5091, CAJ 5024, CAJ 5090, CAJ WJ 5042 CAJ 5017 CAJ 5091, 5024, CAJ 5017 3 FA5016, CAJ CAJ 5006 3 CAJ 5090, CAJ 5024, CAJ 5006 CAJ 5061, 5024, CAJ 5091, CAJ 5017 CAJ 5090, CAJ 5017 4 CBJ 5006 N/A* N/A 4 WJ 5028, N/A* N/A CBJ 5006 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Gienapp Architects 07 8413 - Page 5 of 8 Watertown Middle School- Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA ELECTRICAL 1 CAJ 6006, CAJ CAJ 6026 ELECTRIC 1 CAJ 6006, CAJ 6001, CAJ 6026 BUSWAY CAJ 6017 6001, AL CAJ 6017 CAJ 6002 CAJ BUSWAY 6002 2 CAJ 6006, CAJ CAJ 6026 2 CAJ 6006, CAJ 6001, CAJ 6026 CAJ 6017 6001, CAJ 6017 CAJ 6002 CAJ 6002 3 CAJ 6006, CAJ N/A 3 CAJ 6006, CAJ 6001, N/A CAJ 6017 6001, CAJ 6017 CAJ 6002 CAJ 6002 NON- 1 CAJ 7046 CAJ CAJ 7036 NON- 1 CAJ 7046, CAJ 7003, CAJ 7036 INSULATED CAJ 7051 7003, INSULATE WJ 7029, CAJ 7021 MECHANICAL CAJ D WJ 7022 DUCTWORK 7021 MECHANI WITHOUT CAL DAMPERS DUCTWO RK WITHOUT DAMPERS 2 CAJ 7046 CAJ N/A 2 CAJ 7046, CAJ 7003, CAJ 7036 CAJ 7051 7003, WJ 7029, CAJ 7021 CAJ WJ 7022 7021 3 CAJ 7046 CAJ N/A 3 CAJ 7046 CAJ 7003, N/A CAJ 7051 7003, CAJ 7051 CAJ 7021 CAJ 7021 MIXED 1 CAJ 8056, CAJ CAJ 8051 MIXED 1 CAJ 8096, CAJ 8001, CAJ 8051 PENETRANTS CAJ 8095, 8001, PENETRA CAJ 8099 CAJ 8013 CAJ 8099 CAJ NTS WJ 8007 8013 2 CAJ 8056, CAJ CAJ 8051 2 CAJ 8096, CAJ 8001, CAJ 8051 CAJ 8095, 8001, CAJ 8099 CAJ 8013 CAJ 8099 CAJ WJ 8007 8013 3 CAJ 8056, CAJ CAJ 8051 3 CAJ 8099 CAJ 8001, CAJ 8051 CAJ 8095, 8001, WJ 8007 CAJ 8013 CAJ 8099 CAJ 8013 4 CAJ 8095 N/A* N/A 4 WJ 8007 N/A* N/A WOOD UL-CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS GYPSUM UL-CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS FLOORS WALLBOARD ASSEMBLIES TYPE OF F- HILTI 3M BIO-FIRE TYPE OF F- HILTI 3M BIO-FIRE PENETRANT RATING PENETRA RATING NT METAL PIPES 1 FC 1009, FC 1002 FC 1031 METAL 1 WL 1054, WL 1146 WL 1115 OR CONDUIT FC 1059 PIPES OR WL 1164 CONDUIT 2 WL 1054, WL 1010, WL 1115 WL1164 WL1146 2 FC 1009, FC 1002 FC 1031 4 WL 1110 WL 1001 FC 1059 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Gienapp Architects 07 8413 - Page 6 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA NOW 1 PC 2025, PC 2024 PC 2059 NOW 1 WL 2078, WL 2088, WL 2133 METALLIC PC 2126 METALLIC WL 2075, WL 2002 PIPE OR PIPE OR WL 2128 CONDUIT CONDUIT 2 WL 2078, WL 2088, WL 2133 WL 2075, WL 2002 WL 2128 2 PC 2025, PC 2024 PC 2059 PC 2126 4 WL 2184, N/A* WL 2245 SINGLE OR 1 PC 3012, PC 3017 PC 3050 SINGLE 1 WL 3065 WL 3032, WL 3153 BUNDLED PC 3044 OR WL 3030 CABLES BUNDLED CABLES 2 WL 3065 WL 3032, WL 3153 WL 3030 4 WL 3139 N/A* 2 PC 3012 PC 3017 N/A CABLE 1 WL 4011, WL 4004 WL 4032 TRAY WL 4019 2 WL 4011, WL 4004 WL 4032 WL 4019 4 WL 8014 N/A* INSULATED 1 PC 5004, PC 5014 PC 5025 INSULATE 1 WL 5029, WL 5040, WL 5062 PIPES PC 5036, D PIPES WL 5096 WL 5001, PC 5037 WL 5032 2 WL 5029, WL 5040, WL 5062 WL 5096 WL 5001, WL 5032 2 PC 5004 N/A* PC 5025 4 WL 5073 N/A* 4 WL 5073 NOW 1 PC 7013 PC 7001 NOW 1 WL 7040, WL 7008 WL 7037 INSULATED INSULATE WL 7042 MECHANICAL D DUCTWORK MECHANI WITHOUT CAL DAMPERS DUCTWO RK WITHOUT DAMPERS 2 WL 7040, WL 7008, WL 7037 WL 7042 WL 7013, WL 7016 4 MIXED 1 PC 8014, PC 8013 N/A MIXED 1 WL 8004, WL 8010 WL 8017 PENETRANTS PC 8026 PENETRA WL 8013 NTS 2 WL 8004, WL 8010, WL 8017 WL 8013 WL 8002 2 N/A* N/A* N/A 4 WL 8014 N/A* 4 WL 8014 *No UL-Classified system is available as of August 2003. Engineer Judgement Drawing Required PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Gienapp Architects 07 8413 - Page 7 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Sealants, including joint bead back-up, primers, in the following joints and locations: a. Interior joints between door or window frames and adjacent surfaces; Sealant Tvpe 2. b. Interior joints between door or window trim or frames and adjacent surfaces; Sealant Twe 2. C. Interior joints between ceramic tile and dissimilar materials, between plastic laminate surfaces and dissimilar materials, and where indicated to be 'mildew resistant' or'sanitary' sealant; Sealant Tvpe 3. d. Other joints indicated on the drawings to receive Sealant; Type 1 for Exterior joints and Type 2 for Interior Joints. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board"for sealing perimeter joints. 2. Section 09 3000 "Tiling"for sealing tile joints. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications:An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 3. When joint substrates are wet. 4. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. JOINT SEALANTS Gienapp Architects 07 9200 - Page 1 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 5. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 6. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 7. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 8. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 9. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 10. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 11. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Sealant Tvpe 2: Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 12. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation. b. Tremco Incorporated. 2.3 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Sealant Tvpe 3: Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 13. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation. 2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing byjoint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. JOINT SEALANTS Gienapp Architects 07 9200 - Page 2 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 14. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 15. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 16. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 17. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. JOINT SEALANTS Gienapp Architects 07 9200 - Page 3 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 18. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 19. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 20. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 21. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 22. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 23. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 24. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 25. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 26. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 27. Provide flush joint profile at according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 28. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 29. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 2 tests for each type of of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 30. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 31. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. C. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 32. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. JOINT SEALANTS Gienapp Architects 07 9200 - Page 4 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 33. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALANTS Gienapp Architects 07 9200 - Page 5 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK JOINT SEALANTS Gienapp Architects 07 9200 - Page 6 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA NOTES: 1. Jobsite conditions of each through-penetration firestop system must meet all details of the UL-Classified System selected. 3. Coordinate work with other trades to assure that penetration-opening sizes are appropriate for penetrant locations, and vice versa. 4. For 3-hour rated gypsum walls, contact the firestop manufacturer for a UL-classified system or engineer judgement draw- ing. END OF SECTION PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Gienapp Architects 07 8413 - Page 8 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes furnishing only the following items and materials: None. B. Section includes the installation only of the following items and materials: 1. Glass for hollow metal door. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM- HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,concrete inserts,anchor bolts,and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 7. Details of anchorages,joints, field splices, and connections. 8. Details of accessories. 9. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly,for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire-rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Gienapp Architects 08 1113 - Page 1 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. DE LA FONTAINE. 2. National Custom Hollow Metal Doors & Frames. 3. North American Door Corp. 4. Philipp Manufacturing Co (The). 5. Republic Doors and Frames. 6. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand. 7. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc. 2.2 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2; SDI A250.4, Level B. 1. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch,with minimum A60coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges. f. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration. g. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. h. Core: Polystyrene. 2. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A60 coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 3. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.3 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated. 2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet. 3. Post installed Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer. B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Gienapp Architects 08 1113 - Page 2 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA C. Material: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware. 2.6 STEEL FINISHES A. Factory Finish Over Galvanized Steel: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard two- coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, complying with SDI A250.3. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Gienapp Architects 08 1113 - Page 3 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. 2. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth,flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. A. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 NAAMM-HMMA 841 and NAAMM-HMMA guide specification indicated. 3.3 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP A. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Gienapp Architects 08 1113 - Page 4 of 4 Watertown Middle School- Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Related documents: 1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. The work in this section includes furnishing all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified necessary for swinging doors. Except items, which are specifically excluded from this section of the specification or of unique hardware, specified in the same sections as the doors and frames on which they are installed. 2. Section includes: a. Hanging Devices b. Cylinder and Keying C. Locking Devices d. Door Closers e. Door Stops B. Related sections: 1. 08 12 13- Hollow Metal Frames 2. 08 14 16- Flush Wood Doors 1.3 REFERENCES A. Standards 1. AIA A201 1997-General Conditions of the Contract 2. ANSI-A250.4-Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance 3. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges 4. ANSI A156.2- Bored Locks and Latches 5. ANSI A156.3- Exit Devices 6. ANSI A156.4- Door Controls- Door Closers 7. ANSI A156.5-Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products 8. ANSI A156.6-Architectural Door Trim 9. ANSI A156.7-Template Hinge Dimensions 10. ANSI A156.8- Door Controls-Overhead Holders 11. ANSI A156.13- Mortise Locks and Latches 12. ANSI A156.15-Closer Holder Release Devices 13. ANSI A156.16-Auxiliary Hardware 14. ANSI A156.18- Material and Finishes 15. ANSI A156.26-Continuous Hinges 16. UL10C- Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies B. CODES 1. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code 2. IBC 2009- International Building Code 3. ANSI A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 4. ADA-Americans with Disabilities Act 5. 780 CMR-8th Edition - Massachusetts State Building Code DOOR HARDWARE Gienapp Architects 08 7100 - Page 1 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General Requirements 1. Submit copies of finish hardware schedule in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. B. Schedules And Product Data 1. Schedules to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, and organized into"hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door opening to function as intended. Hardware schedule shall be submitted within two(2)weeks from date the purchase order is received by the finish hardware supplier. Furnish four (4) copies of revised schedules after approval for field and file use. Note any special mounting instructions or requirements with the hardware schedule. Schedules to include the following information: a. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. b. Handing and degree of swing of each door. C. Door and frame sizes and materials. d. Keying information. e. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. f. Elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings. g. Name and manufacturer of each hardware item. h. Fastenings and other pertinent information. i. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule j. Mounting locations for hardware when varies from standard. 2. Submit catalog cuts and/or product data sheets for all scheduled finish hardware. 3. Submit separate detailed keying schedule for approval indicating clearly how the owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. C. Samples 1. Upon request, samples of each type of hardware in finish indicated shall be submitted. Samples are to remain undamaged and in working condition through submittal and review process. Items will be returned to the supplier or incorporated into the work within limitations of keying coordination requirements. D. Templates 1. Furnish a complete list and suitable templates, together with finish hardware schedule to contractor, for distribution to necessary trades supplying materials to be prepped for finish hardware. E. Operations And Maintenance Manuals 1. Upon completion of construction and building turnover, furnish two (2) complete maintenance manuals to the owner. Manuals to include the following items: a. Approved hardware schedule, catalog cuts and keying schedule. b. Hardware installation and adjustment instructions. C. Manufacturer's written warranty information. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Substitutions 1. All substitution requests must be submitted before bidding and within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his hardware consultant. B. Supplier Qualifications 1. A recognized architectural door hardware supplier who has maintained an office and has been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of at least two (2)years. 2. Hardware supplier shall have office and warehouse facilities to accommodate this project. DOOR HARDWARE Gienapp Architects 08 7100 - Page 2 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3. Hardware supplier shall have in his employment at lease one (1) Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available at reasonable times during business hours for consultation about the project's hardware and requirements to the owner, architect and contractor. 4. Hardware supplier must be an authorized factory distributor of all products specified herein. 1.6 FIRE-RATED OPENINGS A. Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that comply with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)or Warnock Hersey (WH)for use on types and sizes of doors indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Marking And Packaging 1. Properly package and mark items according to the approved hardware schedule, complete with necessary screws and accessories, instructions and installation templates for spotting mortising tools. Contractor shall check deliveries against accepted list and provide receipt for them, after which he is responsible for storage and care. Any shortage or damaged good shall be made without cost to the owner. 2. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier. As hardware supplier receives material from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set and door numbers to match the approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. B. Delivery 1. The supplier shall deliver all hardware to the project site; direct factory shipments are not allowed unless agreed upon beforehand. Hardware supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer/contractor until each is satisfied that count is correct. 2. No keys, other than construction master keys and/or temporary keys are to be packed in boxes with the locks. 3. At time of hardware delivery, door openings supplier in conjunction with the contractor shall check in all hardware and set up a hardware storage room. C. Storage 1. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. All items, except as noted below, shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1)year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance. In the event of product failure, promptly repair or replace item with no additional cost to the owner. 1. Cylindrical locksets— Heavy Duty: Five (5)years 2. Exit Devices: Five (5)years 3. Door closers: Ten (10)years PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Only manufacturers as listed below shall be accepted. Obtain each type of finish hardware (hinges, latch and locksets, exit devices, door closers, etc.)from a single manufacturer. DOOR HARDWARE Gienapp Architects 08 7100 - Page 3 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2.2 MATERIALS A. Screws And Fasteners 1. All required screws shall be supplied as necessary for securing finish hardware in the appropriate manner. Thru-bolts shall be supplied for exit devices and door closers where required by code and the appropriate blocking or reinforcing is not present in the door to preclude their use. B. Hanging Devices 1. Hinges a. Hinges shall conform to ANSI A156.1 and have the number of knuckles as specified, oil-impregnated bearings as specified with NRP (non-removable pin) feature, at all exterior reverse bevel doors. Unless otherwise scheduled, supply one (1) hinge for every 30" of door height. Hinges shall be a minimum of 4 1/2" high and 4" wide; heavy weight hinges (.180) shall be supplied at all doors where specified. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Stanley 2) Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Hager C. Cylinders And Keying 1. Keying: a. Contractor to supply Arrow small format 6 pin interchangeable permanent cores zero bitted with 2 blanks each to match owners system for keying by the owner. D. Locking Devices 1. Cylindrical Locksets— Heavy Duty a. All locksets shall be ANSI 156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1 Certified. Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset. Lock housing shall be fabricated of steel zinc dichromate and stainless steel. Latchbolt shall be brass or stainless steel with a minimum 1/2" throw. Locks shall be non-handed and fully field reversible. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Schlage ND Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Arrow, Sargent, Best 2. Lockset Strikes a. Strikes shall be non-handed and available with curved lip,full lip or ASA type strikes as required. Provide strikes with lip-length required to accommodate jamb and/or trim detail and projection. E. Door Closers 1. Surface Mounted Closers— Heavy Duty a. All door closers shall be ANSI 156.4, Grade 1 Certified. All surface closers shall be of full rack and pinion construction. Closing speed, latching speed and backcheck shall be controlled by key operated valves. Closers shall be non-handed to meet a variety of door conditions and design requirements. Closers shall project no more than 2 3/4"from the surface of the door.All arms shall be finely finished with heavy duty forged steel main arm and closer covers shall be of high impact plastic material of flame retardant grade. 1) Specified Manufacturer: LCN 4040XP Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Arrow, Sargent, Stanley F. Door Trim And Protective Plates 1. Kick plates shall be .050 gauges and two (2) inches less full width of door, or as specified. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as shown in the hardware schedule. a. Specified Manufacturers: Ives b. Approved Substitutes: Rockwood, Trimco G. Door Stops And Holders 1. Wall Mounted Door Stops DOOR HARDWARE Gienapp Architects 08 7100 - Page 4 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA a. Where a door is indicated on the plans to strike flush against a wall, wall bumpers shall be provided. Provide convex or concave design as indicated. 1) Specified Manufacturers: Ives 2) Approved Substitutes: Rockwood, Trimco H. Gasketing And Thresholds 1. Provide continuous weatherseal on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide intumescent seals as required to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 2. Provide threshold units not less than 4" wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames. All threshold units shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA). a. Specified Manufacturers: Pemko b. Approved Substitutes: Reese, Zero I. Silencers 1. Furnish rubber door silencers all hollow metal frames; two (2) per pair and three (3) per single door frame. 2.3 FINISHES A. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18 or traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather elements prior to installing interior door hardware. Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is free of defects. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations. 1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI.) 2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors." B. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with best trade practice by an experienced hardware installer. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. D. Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. DOOR HARDWARE Gienapp Architects 08 7100 - Page 5 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall comply with AIA A201 1997 section 3.3.1 which reads as follows: "The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters." B. Prior to the installation of hardware, manufacturer's representatives for locksets, closers, and exit devices shall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing contractor's personnel on the proper installation of their respective products. A letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting is held and who is in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect and Owner. C. The hardware supplier shall do a final inspection prior to building completion to ensure that all hardware was correctly installed and is in proper working order. D. The manufacturer's representative shall do a final inspection prior to building completion to ensure that all hardware was correctly installed and is in proper working order. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. B. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore to proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. C. Instruct owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes and usage of any electronic devices. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Contractor shall protect all hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. 3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Hardware supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products as listed in the hardware heading. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. 1. Manufacturer's Abbreviations: a. SC - Schlage b. LC— LCN C. VD—Von Duprin d. ST- Stanley e. PE—Pemko f. RO- Rockwood g. IV- Ives DOOR HARDWARE Gienapp Architects 08 7100 - Page 6 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SET: Storeroom Doors: 104,105 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset—Storeroom PB 5405LN LC 626 YA 1 Cylinder Core 100CR 26D AO 1 Closer 4040 XP series DEL AL LC 1 Kickplate 8400UL 8 x 2LDW US32D IV 1 Wall Bumper WS407CCV US32D IV SET: Passage Doors: 103 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset— Passage PB5401 LN 626 YA 1 Closer 4040 XP series DEL AL LC 1 Kickplate 8400UL 8 x 2LDW US32D IV 1 Wall Bumper WS407CCV US32D IV SET: Office Doors: 102 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset—Office PB5404LN 626 YA 1 Cylinder Core 100CR 26D AO 1 Closer 4040 XP series DEL AL LC 1 Kickplate 8400UL 8 x 2LDW US32D IV 1 Wall Bumper WS407CCV US32D IV SET: Classroom Security Lock Doors: 100A,101,106 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset—Classroom PB5418LN 626 YA 1 Cylinder Core 100CR 26D AO 1 Closer 4040 XP series DEL AL LC 1 Kickplate 8400UL 8 x 2LDW US32D IV 1 Wall Bumper WS407CCV US32D IV SET: Push/Pull Doors: 100A,101,106 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Door Pull RM3340 US32D RO 1 Closer 4040 XP series DEL AL LC 1 Kickplate 8400UL 8 x 2LDW US32D IV 1 Wall Bumper WS407CCV US32D IV END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE Gienapp Architects 08 7100 - Page 7 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DOOR HARDWARE Gienapp Architects 08 7100 - Page 8 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Non-structural metal framing for partitions, ceilings, soffits, furring, strapping and other conditions. 2. Abuse-resistant, mold and moisture resistant panels for all panels installed in the toilet rooms and where not covered by cementitious backer board or tile. 3. Finishing of gypsum board surfaces 4. Tile backing panels. B. Items To Be Installed Only: Install the following items as furnished by the designated Sections: 1. Blanket insulation in metal stud partitions; Section 07 2100 "Building Insulation" C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry"for blocking 2. Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants." 4. Section 09 3000 "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile. 5. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for primers and finish coats applied to gypsum board surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Gienapp Architects 09 2900 - Page 1 of 8 Watertown Middle School- Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 2. National Gypsum Company. 3. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Moisture-and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture-and mold- resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325,with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard. b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control)joint. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Gienapp Architects 09 2900 - Page 2 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2.7 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch . b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch . b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. E. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable,corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated- steel thickness of 0.033 inch . 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. 2.8 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining,without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Gienapp Architects 09 2900 - Page 3 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA D. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch . b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. E. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 2.9 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR . b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation." F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation." G. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Gienapp Architects 09 2900 - Page 4 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA E. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. F. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. G. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated. 4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. H. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. I. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Gienapp Architects 09 2900 - Page 5 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3.4 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces(above ceilings,etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing,with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Gienapp Architects 09 2900 - Page 6 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3.5 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings and where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Moisture-and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.6 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI Al08.11, at locations indicated to receive tile. B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles,edge trim,control joints, penetrations,fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." 4. Level 5: At 'Lobby 102' a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. F. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 PROTECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Gienapp Architects 09 2900 - Page 7 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non- drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Gienapp Architects 09 2900 - Page 8 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 09 3000 CERAMIC TILING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Glazed wall tile. 3. Stone thresholds. 4. Tile backing panels. 5. Metal edge strips. B. Related Requirements: 6. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 7. Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board"for cementitious backer units. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI Al08.01, ANSI Al08.02, ANSI Al08.1A, ANSI Al08.1B, ANSI Al08.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI Al08.11, ANSI Al08.12, ANSI Al08.13, ANSI Al08.14, ANSI Al08.15, ANSI Al08.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. D. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 8. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For tile, grout, and accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: 9. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each color blend. 10. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 36 inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 11. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 12. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 13. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. CERAMIC TILING Gienapp Architects 09 3013 - Page 1 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 14. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. a. 15. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 16. Installer is a Five-Star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors'Association of America. 17. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman Certification. 18. Installer employs only Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers for Project. 19. Installer employs at least one installer for Project that has completed the Advanced Certification for Tile Installers (ACT) certification for installation of mud walls and large format tile. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from single source or producer. 20. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 21. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 22. Obtain waterproof membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer: 23. Stone thresholds. 24. Waterproof membrane. 25. Crack isolation membrane. CERAMIC TILING Gienapp Architects 09 3013 - Page 2 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 26. Cementitious backer units. 27. Metal edge strips. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 28. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles,ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 29. Where tile is indicated for installation or in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Ceramic Tile Type: Factory-mounted unglazed ceramic mosaic floor tile. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Olean, a division of Dal-Tile Corporation. b. Crossville,Inc. C. Daltile. 2. Composition: Vitreous or impervious natural clay or porcelain. 3. Certification: Porcelain tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 4. Basis of Design: Daltile Mosaic 5. Module Size: 2" by 2" 6. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 7. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 8. Surface: Slip resistant, with abrasive admixture. 9. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 10. Finish: Semimat, opaque Semimat, clear glaze. 11. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. One field color and one accent color. 12. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 13. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: B. Ceramic Tile Type CT-2: Glazed wall tile. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Olean, a division of Dal-Tile Como ration. b. Daltile. C. Grupo Porcelanite. 14. Basis of Design: Daltile Sonic White, Daltile Intensity Pebble 15. Module Size: 12x24 16. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 17. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 18. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. CERAMIC TILING Gienapp Architects 09 3013 - Page 3 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 19. Finish: Semimat, opaque Semimat, clear glaze. 20. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. One field color and one accent color. 21. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 22. Mounting: Factory, back mounted. 23. Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles are factory assembled and grouted with manufacturer's standard white silicone rubber. 24. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved, module size 6" high by 12" wide. b. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Straight, module size 6" high by 12"wide. C. Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose cap, module size 3" high by 6"wide. d. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 3" high by 6"wide. e. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile. f. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape with radius of at least 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. g. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining flat tile. h. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes. C. Accessories: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, suitable for installing by same method as used for adjoining wall tile. 2.4 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 25. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C503/C503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 according to ASTM C1353 or ASTM C241/C241 M and with honed finish. 26. Description: Uniform, fine-to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. 27. Description: Match Architect's sample. 28. Description: Provide one of the following: a. 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI Al 18.9 or ASTM C1325, Type A, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Custom Building Products. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. C. USG Corporation. 29. Thickness: 1/2 inch. CERAMIC TILING Gienapp Architects 09 3013 - Page 4 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2.6 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement Mortar(Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02. 30. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D226/D226M, Type I (No. 15); or polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D4397, 4.0 mils thick. 31. Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C847. a. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath. b. Base Metal and Finish for Exterior Applications: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. C. Configuration over Studs and Furring: Flat. d. Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self-furring. e. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd. B. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI Al 18.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Atlas Minerals &Chemicals,Inc. b. Bostik,Inc. C. MAPEI Corporation. 32. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2.7 GROUT MATERIALS A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI Al 18.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. MAPEI Corporation. C. Siena Products, Omeea. 33. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. B. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; nickel silver exposed-edge material. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Blanke Comoration. CERAMIC TILING Gienapp Architects 09 3013 - Page 5 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA b. Ceramic Tool Companv, Inc. C. Schluter Svstems L.P. 2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 34. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 35. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 36. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 37. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile- setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproof membrane by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI Al08.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CERAMIC TILE A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods,specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 38. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI Al08 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Exterior tile floors. CERAMIC TILING Gienapp Architects 09 3013 - Page 6 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA b. Tile floors in wet areas. C. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. d. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile,vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 39. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 40. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 41. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 42. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. 43. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch. 44. Pressed Floor Tile:. 45. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/8 inch. 46. Porcelain Tile: 1/4 inch. H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints,where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 47. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. J. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 48. At locations where mortar bed (thickset)would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in modified dry-set mortar(thinset). 49. Do not extend cleavage membrane under thresholds set in standard dry-set modified dry- set or improved modified dry-set mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on cleavage membrane with elastomeric sealant. K. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet,wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. L. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF TILE BACKING PANEL A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use modified dry-set mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. CERAMIC TILING Gienapp Architects 09 3013 - Page 7 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 50. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 51. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 52. Ceramic Tile Installation TCNA F116;. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-1 b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 53. Ceramic Tile Installation:TCNA F132;water-cleanable,tile-setting epoxy on cured cement mortar bed installed over cleavage membrane; epoxy grout. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-1 b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. B. Interior Wall Installations, Masonry or Concrete: 54. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W221 and ANSI Al08.1B, cement mortar bed (thickset) on metal lath. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-2 b. Bond Coat for Cured-Bed Method: Standard dry-setmortar. C. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 55. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W222 and ANSI A108.1 B; one-coat cement mortar bed (thickset)on metal lath over cleavage membrane. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-2 b. Bond Coat for Cured-Bed Method: Standard dry-setmortar. C. Grout: Sand-portland cement grout. C. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring: 56. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W221 and ANSI A108.1 B; cement mortar bed (thickset) on solid backing. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-2 b. Bond Coat for Wet-Set Method: Modified dry-set mortar. C. Bond Coat for Cured-Bed Method: Modified dry-set mortar. d. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 57. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W222 and ANSI A108.1 B; one-coat cement mortar bed (thickset)on solid backing. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-2 b. Bond Coat for Cured-Bed Method: Modified dry-set mortar. C. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 58. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-2 b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. C. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. END OF SECTION CERAMIC TILING Gienapp Architects 09 3013 - Page 8 of 8 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Acoustical tiles for ceilings. 2. Exposed grid suspension systems. 3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings B. Items To Be Furnished Only: Furnish the following items for installation by the designated Sections: Not Applicable. C. Items To Be Installed Only: Install the following items as furnished by the designated Sections: Not Applicable. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board Assembles" 2. Section 21 0001 "Fire Protection" 3. Section 22 0001 "Plumbing" 4. Section 23 0001 "HVAC" 5. Section 26 0001 "Electrical" E. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6-inches- in size. C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Tile: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Concealed Suspension-System Members: 6-inch- long Sample of each type. 3. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long Samples of each type and color. D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension-system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot. E. Qualification Data: For testing agency. F. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by. G. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES. H. Field quality-control reports. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS Gienapp Architects 09 5123 - Page 1 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension Systems: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP)for testing indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS Gienapp Architects 09 5123 - Page 2 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. C. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795. D. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical tiles are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong Ultima 1911, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Classification: Provide tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type IV, Form 2 2. Fire Class: Class A 3. Pattern: E (lightly textured) C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.90 E. NRC: Not less than 0.70 F. CAC: Not less than 35 G. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled Tegular H. Thickness: 3/4 inch I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches J. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical tiles treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS Gienapp Architects 09 5123 - Page 3 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC 1 service condition. b. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchors. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire. D. Hanger Rods : Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee System or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips and complying with seismic design requirements and the following: 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Acoustical Tile Adhesive: Type recommended by acoustical tile manufacturer, bearing UL label for Class 0-25 flame spread. 1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Staples: 5/16-inch- long, divergent-point staples. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Testing Substrates: Before installing adhesively applied tiles on wet-placed substrates such as cast-in-place concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer's recommended limits. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS Gienapp Architects 09 5123 - Page 4 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows: 1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. G. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS Gienapp Architects 09 5123 - Page 5 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile. 2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c. 3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire- resistance-rated assembly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS Gienapp Architects 09 5123 - Page 6 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 09 6513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl base. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 2. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 60 or more than 95 deg F 75, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods: 5. 48 hours before installation. 6. During installation. 7. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 2.2 VINYL BASE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Gienapp Architects 09 6513 - Page 1 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1. Armstronq World Industries, Inc. 2. Flexco. 3. Johnsonite; a Tarkett companv. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TV(vinyl, thermoplastic). 8. Group: I (solid, homogeneous) 9. Style and Location: a. Style B, Cove: Provide at inteior side of all perimeter foundation walls. C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch D. Height: 4 inches E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long. F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. H. Colors and Patterns: As selected by architect from Manufacturers full range. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 10. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 11. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710. 12. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 13. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 14. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 10 pH. 15. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 16. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Gienapp Architects 09 6513 - Page 2 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 17. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 18. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Stair Accessories: 19. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 20. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units. C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 21. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 22. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 23. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. 24. Apply coat(s). E. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Gienapp Architects 09 6513 - Page 3 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Gienapp Architects 09 6513 - Page 4 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 09 6519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this Section, including but not limited to the following: 1. Rubber floor tile. 2. Resilient base for rubber tile flooring. 3. Resilient base at floor areas to receive carpet. 4. Resilient base at ceramic tile floor at Lobby. 5. Resilient molding accessories. 6. Flash patching at floors to receive rubber tile. B. Items To Be Furnished Only: Furnish the following items for installation by the designated Sections: Not Applicable. C. Items To Be Installed Only: Install the following items as furnished by the designated Sections: 1. Owner furnished rubber floor tile for patching outside the boy's locker room entrance door 100A. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile and accessory required. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: 2 tiles of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. 2. Resilient base: one feet of each type and color 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. B. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Gienapp Architects 09 6519 - Page 1 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. F. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RUBBER FLOOR TILE A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Roppe Raised Design Rubber Floor Tile, or approved equal. 1. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1344— Rubber Tile; Type 1 A& B. Grade 1 2. Wearing Surface: Low Profile Raised Circular Design 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 4. Size: 19 11/16 inches by 19 11/16 inches. 5. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. a. Allow for the selection of 3 colors for this tile type. b. Architect reserves to utilize up to one filed color and one accent/border color in each room or space. Accent/border color may be up to 20% of tile. 2.2 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Roppe Corporation, USA. b. Johnsonite. C. Estrie Products International; American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd. d. Flexco, Inc. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TV(vinyl, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) 3. Style: Cove (base with toe) for areas of resilient flooring and Cove Caps for areas to receive carpet base. C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inches or as indicated on Drawings. E. Lengths: Cut lengths, 48 inches long. F. Outside Corners: Field formed. G. Inside Corners: field formed. H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors 1. Up to 2 colors of cove base and 2 colors of straight base may be used on project. 2.3 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY (TRANSITION STRIPS) A. Resilient Molding Accessories: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Gienapp Architects 09 6519 - Page 2 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA a. Johnsonite. b. Flexco, Inc. C. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering, Joiner for tile and carpet, cove caps for carpet base, and transition strips. C. Material: Vinyl. D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated in Drawings E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. b. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. C. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Gienapp Architects 09 6519 - Page 3 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening)at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Gienapp Architects 09 6519 - Page 4 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply two coat(s). E. Cover floor tile and resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Gienapp Architects 09 6519 - Page 5 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Gienapp Architects 09 6519 - Page 6 of 6 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Wood. 2. Gypsum board. 3. CMU. 4. Any item indicated on the drawings "Paint", "by 09 9123", or"09 9123". 5. Prefinished items, such as plastic laminates, and items indicated to receive a transparent or stain finish are not included. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board", for new gypsum wallboard partitions. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. INTERIOR PAINTING Gienapp Architects 09 9123 - Page 1 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1.6 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING A. Staging and scaffolding shall be provided by this section. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Glidden Professional. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Masonry: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. INTERIOR PAINTING Gienapp Architects 09 9123 - Page 2 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment b. Uninsulated metal piping. C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect. INTERIOR PAINTING Gienapp Architects 09 9123 - Page 3 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Manufacturers and products listed below are Basis of Design products. Acceptable manufacturers and products include but are not limited to those listed below. B. Masonry Substrates: 1. Latex System MPI INT 4.2A: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. 1) Benjamin Moore's "Super Spec". b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Latex, interior(MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. 1) Benjamin Moore's "Ultra Spec 500". C. Wood Substrates: Wood trim, Architectural woodwork, Doors, Windows and wood board paneling. Do not paint wood items to receive stained or transparent finish. 1. Latex over Latex Primer System MPI INT 6.3T: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. 1) Benjamin Moore's "Fresh Start". b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Latex, interior(MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. 1) Benjamin Moore's "Ultra Spec 500." D. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. 1) Benjamin Moore's "Ultra Spec 500." b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. 1) Benjamin Moore's "Ultra Spec 500." END OF SECTION INTERIOR PAINTING Gienapp Architects 09 9123 - Page 4 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 10 2116.19 PLASTIC TOILET AND DRESSING COMPARTMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-plastic compartments for dressing compartments and toilet partitions. B. Related Requirements: 2. Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry"for blocking. 3. Section 10 2800 "Toilet Accessories"for grab bars, and similar accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 4. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For shower and dressing compartments. 5. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 6. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted accessories. 7. Show locations of centerlines of drains. 8. Show ceiling grid, ceiling-mounted items, and overhead support or bracing locations. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of compartment material indicated. 9. Include Samples of hardware and accessories for material and color selection. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For shower and dressing compartments to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of fixtures, drains, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with shower and dressing compartments by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC Al 17.1 for shower and dressing compartments designated as accessible. 2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC COMPARTMENTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. General Partitions Com. b. Accurate Partitions Com_ . C. Marlite B. Configuration: Shower and dressing compartments. PLASTIC SHOWER AND DRESSING COMPARTMENTS Gienapp Architects 10 211619 - Page 1 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA C. Enclosure Style: Overhead braced. D. Panel and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 10. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 11. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, clear-anodized extruded-aluminum or stainless steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder malicious combustion. 12. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room; as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Door Construction: Match panels. Equip door and pilasters with manufacturer's standard no-sightline system. F. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; solid plastic or stainless steel. 13. Plastic Color and Pattern: Match pilaster. G. Brackets (Fittings): 14. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; clear-anodized extruded aluminum. a. Plastic Color and Pattern: Match panel. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. B. Stainless Steel Castings: ASTM A743/A743M. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Door Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty, operating hardware and accessories. Mount to panels with through-bolts. 15. Material: Clear-anodized aluminum. 16. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, integral hinge for solid-plastic doors, allowing emergency access by lifting door. 17. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard, surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 18. Clothing Hooks: Manufacturer's standard clothing hooks in each dressing compartment; include one combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper at inswinging doors, sized to prevent door from hitting wall panel or compartment-mounted accessories. 19. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard, rubber-tipped bumper at outswinging doors. 20. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at outswinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, extruded-aluminum headrail or cap with antigrip profile; in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Headrail with Hooks: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, extruded-aluminum headrail or cap with curtain hooks running in concealed track; with antigrip profile; in manufacturer's standard finish. D. Seats: Manufacturer's standard, panel-mounted or benches. 21. Material: Solid phenolic. 22. Operation: Fixed. 23. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, exposed fasteners of stainless steel,chrome-plated steel, or solid brass,finished to match the items they are securing;with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. Use countersunk, flush-type bolt heads or otherwise make fasteners inconspicuous if exposed on opposite side of panel from hardware or accessory item. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. PLASTIC SHOWER AND DRESSING COMPARTMENTS Gienapp Architects 10 211619 - Page 2 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2.5 FABRICATION A. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant supports, leveling method, and anchors at pilasters and walls to suit floor and wall conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling method. B. Door Sizes and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide, inswinging doors for standard shower and dressing compartments, and 36-inch-wide, outswinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install compartments rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure compartments in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 24. Clearances for Dressing Compartments: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch between panels and walls. 25. Full-Height(Continuous) Brackets for Dressing Compartments: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets. a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor, and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous headrail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION PLASTIC SHOWER AND DRESSING COMPARTMENTS Gienapp Architects 10 211619 - Page 3 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PLASTIC SHOWER AND DRESSING COMPARTMENTS Gienapp Architects 10 211619 - Page 4 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 10 2800 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Installation of accessories furnished by Owner. B. Related Requirements: 3. Section 09 3000 "Ceramic Tiling"for ceramic toilet and bath accessories. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 4. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 5. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 6. Include electrical characteristics. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 7. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects. 8. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS A. Owner-Furnished Materials: 1. Toilet paper dispensers 2. Paper towel dispensers 3. Soap dispensers 4. Janitor closet utility rack TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Gienapp Architects 102800- Page 1 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.3 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Grab Bar : a. American Specialties,Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. C. Bradlev Corporation. 9. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 10. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Smooth, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin)on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 11. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 12. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. C. Mirror Unit : 13. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Specialties,Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. C. Bradlev Corporation. 14. Frame: Stainless steel channel. a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard. 15. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 16. Size: As indicated on Drawings. D. Coat Hook : 17. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Specialties,Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. C. Bradlev Corporation. 18. Description: Double-prong unit. 19. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). 2.4 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B19, flat products; ASTM B16/B16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B30, castings. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM Al008/A1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness. D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating. E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM Al53/A153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and- theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Gienapp Architects 102800- Page 2 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA H. Mirrors: ASTM C1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers'written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 IV, when tested according to ASTM F446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Gienapp Architects 102800- Page 3 of 4 Watertown Middle School— Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Gienapp Architects 102800- Page 4 of 4 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 21 00 00 FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. PART A and DIVISION 01 of PART B, as listed in the TABLE OF CONTENTS, are hereby made part of this SECTION by reference thereto. B. After inspecting all conditions at the site, examine the various trade SECTIONS of the Specifications and be thoroughly familiar with all provisions regarding work included herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 22 00 00— Plumbing B. Section 23 00 00— Heating, Ventilating and Cooling C. Section 26 00 00— Electrical 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Modifications to wet pipe sprinkler system in areas designated as required by Local Authority and the Owners Insurance Authority for fully sprinklered systems for the Facility as required by all applicable codes. Coordinate with all trades and all conditions in order to design and install complete, automatic fire sprinkler systems. B. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Sprinkler Heads, escutcheon plates, Piping Fittings, Hangers and Supports. 2. Sleeves, Escutcheons, Hangers, Access Panels, and Miscellaneous Steel Supports. 3. Testing and Adjusting all Equipment. 4. Obtaining Approval, Permits and Certificates. 5. Provide any other component or related system (whether or not explicitly listed)which is part of the overall design and basic equipment and deemed necessary for its completion, thoroughness and ready for operation in perfect condition. 6. Include in the fire protection work all necessary supervision and the issuing of all coordination information to any other trades who are supplying work to accommodate the fire protection installation. 7. Cutting Coring and patching. 8. Coordination with all other trades. 9. The sprinkler contractor shall be responsible for a complete set of sprinkler system shop drawings of all fire protection systems including all sprinkler system design drawings, sprinkler head layouts, sprinkler piping layouts, sprinkler pipe sizes, all hanger and support layouts, all seismic bracing design, selection of design criteria and remote design areas in accordance with NFPA-13 and NFPA-14 as applicable, all coordination with all architectural drawings and all mechanical drawings, locations of all required valves and equipment, location of all tamper and flow switches, location of all fire department hose Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000- 1 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA valves and fire department connection, coordination with local fire department for all required design criteria, and creation of sprinkler system shop drawings that will be used for the actual installation of the fire protection systems. 10. Sprinkler head coverage will be provided for all rooms and areas of the building including, in accordance with NFPA-13. 11. The building shall be provided with fire sprinkler systems in accordance with NFPA-13. All rooms shall be provided with sprinklers regardless of size and function. All concealed spaces made wholly or partly of exposed combustible material shall be provided with sprinkler coverage. 12. Sprinkler contractor shall be responsible for visiting the site, and survey existing building systems, prior to bid. 1.4 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, materials, workmanship and equipment performance shall conform to the latest governing edition of the following standards, codes, specifications, requirements, and regulations, but not limited to: 1. All Applicable NFPA Standards including NFPA-13, NFPA-14, NFPA-24. 2. Massachusetts State Building Code 8th Edition. 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 4. American Society of Testing and Materials. 5. American National Standards Institute. 6. State and Local Plumbing and Gas Codes. 7. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 9. Owners Insurance Authority guidelines. 10. Massachusetts D.E.P. B. Any other local codes or authorities having jurisdiction, including any other standards specifically indicated in other paragraphs of this specification. C. Under this Section of the Specification, pay all fees, submit all necessary documents, obtain all permits, certificates and necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Prior to installation, provide copies of all permits, approvals and certificates to the Architect for his record. All costs for these requirements shall be borne under this section of the specification. 1.5 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS A. Under this section of the Specification, base all required measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from referenced points established and be responsible for correctly laying out of the work required under this section of the specification. B. In the event of discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the Architect in writing and do not proceed with the related work until instructions have been issued. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Work shall be performed in cooperation with other trades on the project and so scheduled as to allow speedy and efficient completion of the project. Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000-2 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA B. Furnish to all other trades advance information on location and size of all equipment, frames, boxes, sleeves, and openings needed for the work under this section of the specifications, and also furnish layout information and shop drawings necessary to permit trades affected by the work under this section of the specifications to install their work properly coordinated and without delay. C. Where there is evidence that work installed under this section of the specifications interferes with the work of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make satisfactory adjustments. D. With the approval of the Architect and without extra cost to the Owner, make reasonable modifications in work specified under this section of the specifications required to coordinate with normal structural interferences, lights, diffusers, or for proper execution of specified work. E. If work is installed before coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such trades, make all necessary changes in work under this section of the specifications at no additional cost to the Contract. F. Protect all materials and work of other trades from damage that may be caused by the work required under this section of the specifications and be responsible for repairing any damages caused by such work without any additional cost to the Contract. G. Where work of this section will be installed in close proximity to work of other sections or where there is evidence that the work of this section will interfere with work of other sections or conditions, assist in working out space conditions to make satisfactory adjustment. Prepare and submit for approval 3/8" scale or larger working drawings and sections, clearly showing how this work is to be installed in relation to the work of other sections. If the work of this section is installed before coordinating with other trades or so to cause interference with work of other trades, make changes necessary to protect conditions without extra charge. H. Carefully coordinate with all conditions at the site while preparing the sprinkler systems design drawings. All sprinkler work shown on the sprinkler subcontractors design drawings shall be fully coordinated with all conditions at the site to insure that all work shall fit in the spaces. Make reasonable changes to the contract drawings in order to accommodate conditions without extra charge. 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Fire Protection Sub-contractor, the Plumbing Sub-Contractor, the Electrical Sub-contractor, HVAC Sub-Contractor, and the General Contractor shall coordinate all HVAC, plumbing, electrical and sprinkler work with that of each trade, in order to: 1. Avoid interferences between general construction, mechanical, electrical, structural and other specialty trades. 2. Maintain clearances and advise other trades of clearance requirements for operation, repair, removal and testing of mechanical equipment. 3. Indicate aisleways and accessways required on coordinated shop drawings for mechanical equipment rooms, electrical rooms, computer rooms, and kitchens. 4. Coordinate location of sleeves and inserts, including setting in place prior to pouring concrete. B. Fire Protection Coordination Drawings Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000 - 3 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1. The Fire Protection Sub-Contractor shall prepare Coordination Drawings showing all work to be installed as part of Section 21 00 00. The Coordination Drawings shall be on PDF, CAD and/or Revit formats. The Fire Protection Coordination Drawings shall show all equipment, ductwork, pipes, sleeves, inserts, and supports. 2. The Fire Protection Sub-Contractor, after showing all of the fire protection work, shall forward the reproducible coordination drawings to the General Contractor. 3. The sequence of Coordination Drawings shall be HVAC-Electrical-Plumbing-Fire Protection- General Contractor. 4. The Fire Protection Sub-Contractor shall attend a series of meetings arranged by the General Contractor to resolve any real or apparent interferences or conflicts with the work of the other contractors or with ceiling heights shown on the drawings. 5. The Fire Protection Sub-Contractor shall then make adjustments to his work on the Coordination Drawings to resolve any real or apparent interferences or conflicts and forward to the General Contractor. 6. After any real or apparent interferences and conflicts have been resolved and have been incorporated into the Coordination Drawings, the General Contractor shall prepare the final Coordination Drawings and submit to the Architect. 7. The Fire Protection Sub-Contractor shall not install any of his work prior to the preparation of the final Coordination Drawings and the resolution of any real or apparent conflicts. If any Fire Protection work proceeds prior to the final Coordination Drawings, any change to the fire protection work to correct the interferences and conflicts which result will be made by the fire protection Sub-Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. Coordination Drawings are for the fire protection Sub-Contractor's and Architect's use during construction and shall not be construed as replacing any shop, "as-built", or Record Drawings required elsewhere in these Contract Documents. 9. Review of Coordination Drawings shall not relieve the fire protection Sub-Contractor from his overall responsibility for coordination of all work performed pursuant to the Contract or from any other requirements of the Contract. 1.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. All cutting and patching necessary for the proper installation of work to be performed under this Section and subsections shall be performed by the fire protection Sub-Contractor. All cutting and patching associated with demolition work and required for the installation of work under this section shall be by the fire protection Contractor. B. All work shall be fully coordinated with all phases of construction, in order to minimize the requirements for cutting and patching. C. The contractor shall see that all such chases, openings, and sleeves are located accurately and are of the proper size and shape and shall consult with the Engineer in reference to this work. In so doing, he shall confine the cutting to the smallest extent possible consistent with the work to be done. In no case shall piers or structural members be cut without the approval of the Engineer. D. Carefully fit around, close up, repair, patch, and point around the work specified herein to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. E. All of this work shall be carefully done by workmen competent to do such work and with the proper and smallest tools applicable. F. Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be the fire protection contractor's responsibility therefore. Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000-4 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1.9 ACCESSIBILITY A. All work provided under this Section of the Specification shall be installed so that parts requiring periodic inspection, maintenance and repair are readily accessible. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, but changes of substantial magnitude shall not be made prior to written approval from the Architect. 1.10 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels for installation in walls, ceiling and floors at locations to permit access for adjustment, removal, replacement and servicing of all concealed equipment, valves and materials installed under this Section of the specifications. B. Access panels will be installed under the Section of the related trades of the finished surfaces in which they are located. C. All access panels shall be positioned so that the equipment can be easily reached, and the size shall be sufficient for this purpose (min.12"x12"). When access panels are required in corridors, lobby or other habitable areas, they will be located as directed by the Architect. D. Access panels shall be prime painted, keyed alike and provided with cylinder lock and two keys. Units shall be manufactured by Milcor, Inland Steel, Miami, Carrier or approved equal. Required fire resistance of walls and ceilings shall be maintained. E. Access panel shop drawings shall be submitted to the Designer for approval. 1.11 PORTABLE OR DETACHABLE PARTS A. For all work provided under this Section of the Specifications, retain in possession and be responsible for all portable and/or detachable parts and equipment and portions of the installation and all other devices or materials that are relative to and necessary for proper operation and maintenance of the specified systems until final completion of the contract, such items shall be given to the Owner. B. Replace, free of cost, all stolen, lost or damaged items and equipment provided under this section of the specifications relative to the installation and operation of the specified systems before the system is accepted by the Owner. 1.12 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS A. Coordinate with other trades the location of and maintaining in proper positions, sleeves, inserts and anchor bolts to be supplied and/or set in place under this section of the specifications. In the event of incorrectly located preset sleeves, inserts and anchor bolts, etc., all required cutting and patching of finished work shall be done under this section of the specifications. B. Unless otherwise specified herein, all pipes passing through rated floors, walls, ceilings or partitions shall be provided with sleeves as required by code. All sleeves through plenum walls shall be sealed air-tight. C. Filed drilling (core drilling), when required, shall be performed under this section of the specifications, after receipt of approval by the Architect and the General Contractor. Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000-5 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA D. All pipes passing through rated floors, walls, or partitions shall be provided with sleeves as required by code and having an internal diameter with a minimum of one inch larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation on covered lines. E. Sleeves through outside walls (if required) shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with a 150-pound galvanized steel slip on welding flanges, welded at the center of the sleeve and shall be painted with one coat of bitumastic paint, inside and outside. F. Sleeves through masonry floors and interior masonry walls shall be Schedule 40, black, steel pipe. Sleeves through interior nonmasonry walls or partitions shall be 22-gauge galvanized sheet steel. G. The sleeves through outside walls and slab on grade (if required) shall be provided with pipe to wall penetration closures. Seals shall be mechanical type of interlocking rubber links shaped to fill space between pipe and sleeve. Links shall be assembled with bolts to form a belt around the pipe with pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. After seal assembly is positioned, tightening of bolts will provide watertight seal. This Contractor shall determine the required inside diameter of each individual sleeve before ordering, fabricating or installing. The inside diameter of each sleeve shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and to assure a watertight joint. H. Sleeves through walls shall terminate flush with face of wall. Sleeves through floor walls shall terminate 1" above finished floor. I. Required fire resistance of floors and walls shall be maintained where penetrations occur. Fire stopping at sleeves shall be installed per manufacturer recommendations. Fire stopping material shall be UL listed for the service and fire rating. Provide asbestos-free firestopping material capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, gases, and temperature. Provide noncombustible firestopping that is nontoxic to human beings during installation or during fire conditions. Devices and equipment for firestopping service shall be UL FRD listed or FM P7825 approved for use with applicable construction, and penetrating items. 1. Fire Hazard Classification: Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less, a smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with UL 723 or UL listed and accepted. 2. Firestopping Rating: Firestopping materials shall be UL FRD listed or FM P7825 approved for 7" and "T" ratings at least equal to fire-rating of fire wall or floor in which penetrated openings are to be protected, except that 7" and "T" ratings may be 3 hours for firestopping in through-penetrations of 4-hour fire rated wall or floor. J. Escutcheons shall be provided with a set screw to properly hold escutcheon in place and provided at all exposed floor and wall penetrations. Escutcheons on C.P. piping shall be chrome plated. K. Sleeves for PVC piping passing thru floors and walls shall be in strict accordance with the Massachusetts State Plumbing Code. PVC piping passing through fire rated barriers shall be enclosed in a closefitting metal sleeve extending 20" on each side of the wall, floor or barrier. The sleeve shall be 18 gauge or heavier. The space between the sleeve and the wall or floor opening shall be fire-stopped by packing with acceptable non-combustible filler. 1.13 TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, STAGING AND HOISTING EQUIPMENT A. Necessary tools and equipment such as hoisting equipment and staging for erection of equipment shall be furnished, installed and maintained at job site under this section of the Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000-6 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA specifications for fabrication and erecting of all related equipment covered by this section of the specification. 1.14 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNELS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide all supplementary steel, factory fabricated channels and supports required for proper installation, mounting and support of all equipment and systems provided under this section of the specification. B. Supplementary steel and factory fabricated channels shall be firmly connected to building construction in a manner approved by the Architect, as shown on the drawings, or hereinafter specified. C. The type and size of the supporting channels and supplementary steel provided under this section of the specifications shall accommodate all deflections in conformance with the manufacturer's requirements for the specific loading on the system installed therein. D. All supplementary steel and factory fabricated channels shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to the walls, floors and ceiling construction. All turns shall be made with 90 degree and 45-degree fittings, as required to suit the construction and installation conditions. E. All supplementary steel including factory fabricated channels, supports and fittings shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. approved, shall be galvanized steel where exposed or subject to rust producing atmosphere and shall be manufactured by Unistrut, Powerstrut, or approved equal. 1.15 CROSS AND INTERCONNECTIONS A. No equipment, devices or piping shall be installed which will provide a cross or interconnection between a distribution water supply and a drainage, soil or waste pipe which will permit or make possible the backflow of sewage, polluted water or waste into the water supply system. 1.16 TYPICAL DETAILS A. Typical details where shown on the drawings shall apply to each and every item of the systems covered under this section of the specifications where such items are applicable. They are not reproduced in full on the drawings, which in many cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that any other methods proposed to be provided under this Section of the Specifications shall have prior written approval from the Architect before installation. 1.17 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to the requirements of the submittals section 013300 for schedule and form of all submittals. Coordinate this submittal with submittals for all other finishes. B. Materials List: Before purchasing materials for the work, submit to the Architect a complete list showing (1)the materials specified, and (2)the equivalent materials proposed for use, including description of product, if the Subcontractor desires to use materials other than those specified. Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000-7 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA C. Where, under this section of the specification, a proposal has been made to use an item of material or equipment other than that shown or specified in the Contract Documents, assume the cost of and entire responsibility for coordination of this trade and with all other trades involved and assume all costs and responsibility of providing all work necessary for the installation of the substituted products or materials. In addition, make such arrangement and assume costs occasioned by changes in the work of this trade and other trades that may be required in order to install the approved substitution. This trade contractor shall be entirely responsible for all additional costs and performing all additional work and coordination required and necessary to install any and all substituted products and materials. Such changes shall not be a matter for subsequent change order for extra work to the Contract. D. No documents will be accepted for approval and/or review, unless they include complete information pertaining to appurtenances and accessories, are submitted as a package, and where they consist of catalog sheets containing information on non-related materials and equipment, they shall be clearly marked to show which particular items are proposed for use. E. List of Submittals (as required by the new fire sprinkler systems): 1. Piping, Fittings, Couplings and Accessories. 2. Sprinkler Heads. 3. Working Plans (Shop Drawings) and hydraulic calculations, stamped by a Professional Engineer which shall have the approval of the Local fire department and owner's insurance underwriter. F. Submit Material Safety Data Sheet (MSD) on each product with submittal. G. Submit a complete set of working fire protection drawings and hydraulic calculations as outlined in NFPA-13, stamped and signed by a registered engineer, to the Boston fire department and the owner's insurance carrier for approval, prior to the start of any installation. 1.18 SUBCONTRACTS AND SUPPLIERS A. Wherever hereinafter warranties of durability, operating capacity, proper functioning of equipment and the like are called for in this section of the specifications or wherever it is specified herein that the manufacturers shall furnish detail drawings, test certificates, or performance curves, that the manufacturer shall supervise the installation, keep it in repair for a stated period, or render other similar services, responsibility for the performance of the specified service under the actual conditions of installation shall be included as a part of this section of the specifications. B. The same shall apply to cases where special adjustment by manufacturer or other services are necessary to insure proper and efficient functioning of apparatus, and to meet manufacturer's warranty requirements, even though not specifically hereinafter called for. C. Where due to union regulations or trade agreements, any of the work shown of the drawings or specified herein is considered work of other trades, the work in question shall be subcontracted as a part of this section of the specifications and responsibility for the complete installation shall be included in this section of the specifications. 1.19 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000-8 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: 1. Name or Title of Material. 2. Federal Spec. Number, if Applicable. 3. Manufacturer's Stock Number and Date of Manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer's Name. 1.20 SUPERVISION A. This trade shall supply the services of an experienced and competent supervisor who shall be in charge of the work of this Section at the site. 1.21 WARRANTIES A. Submit manufacturer's warranties for products as specified in this section. All warranties shall be submitted to the Architect prior to the FINAL PAYMENT. B. All materials, types of equipment and workmanship furnished under this section shall carry standard warranty against all defects in material and workmanship for a period of not less than one (1)year from date of acceptance by Owner, unless otherwise noted. 1.22 HOISTING, SCAFFOLDING AND PLANKING A. The work to be done under this Section of the Specifications shall include the furnishing, set-up and maintenance of all derricks, hoisting machinery, scaffolds, staging and planking as required for the work. 1.23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Prior to completion of the Contract, provide field operating instructions to the Owner's designated representative with respect to operation functions and maintenance procedures for the equipment and systems installed in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All equipment provided under this Section of the Specifications shall be placed in operation and shall function continuously in an operation test for a period of one week, without shut down due to mechanical failure. C. Prior to scheduling the project final inspection and after completion of the entire installation period, provide all work required to adjust all controls, and all maintenance to place the systems in operation to meet the requirements of this Section of the Specifications and Contract Documents. D. Sufficient advance notice shall be given to the Owner's designated operating personnel for the specific instruction period. Upon completion of instruction, obtain from the representative(s) written verification that the above-mentioned instruction has been performed. Such verification shall be forwarded to the Owner. E. Each copy of the approved operating and maintenance manual shall contain copies of approved shop drawings, equipment literature, cuts, bulletins performance charts, details, equipment and Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000-9 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA engineering data sheets and typewritten instructions relative to the care and maintenance for the operation of the equipment, all properly indexed and bound in a hard-back three ring binder. Flysheets shall be placed before instructions covering each section. Each manual shall have the following minimum contents: 1. Table of Contents. 2. Maintenance: a. Maintenance Instructions. b. Replacement Charts. C. Preventive Maintenance Recommendations. d. Trouble-shooting Charts for Equipment Components. e. Testing Instructions for each Typical Component. f. System Draining and Filling Instructions. g. Two types sets of instructions for ordering spare parts. Each set shall include name, telephone number and address of where they may be obtained. 3. Manufacturer's Literature: a. The equipment for which shop drawings have been submitted and approved. b. Wiring Diagrams. C. Installation Drawings. d. Manufacturer's Representative and Contract Information. e. Guarantees. 1.24 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A. Life safety shall be a primary consideration. Provide all required and prudent material, labor and equipment to comply with applicable safety regulations. Further, provide all material, labor and equipment to comply with reasonable or generally accepted safety precautions as directed by the Owner or the Architect. B. Comply with all of the safety requirements of OSHA throughout the entire construction period of the project. C. Furnish, place and maintain proper guards for prevention of accidents and any other necessary construction required to secure safety of life and property. D. Perform work only in areas of the building as approved by the Owner or his representative. Personnel and equipment access to the site, laydown areas, parking areas and areas of work shall only be as designated and allowed by the Owner. 1.25 SITE SURVEY A. It shall be the responsibility of the sprinkler contractor to visit the site and familiarize himself with all existing conditions to which the new sprinkler systems will be installed. It shall be the responsibility of the sprinkler contractor to conduct a survey of the site and the existing utility conditions and to record these conditions as part of the sprinkler contractor's sprinkler system shop drawings. As part of the new sprinkler system shop drawings, the sprinkler contractor shall indicate all existing conditions that will affect the installation of the new extended sprinkler systems. This information shall include the new hydrant flow test data and the site water service mains to the point where the new hydrant flow test is taken. Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000- 10 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA B. Prior to the commencement of any site work the sprinkler contractor shall contact the Massachusetts Dig-Safe to coordinate all site excavation work. No site work shall begin until this coordination has been performed. C. As part of the site work, the sprinkler contractor shall coordinate with the local water authority for the new connection to the existing underground site water main. The sprinkler contractor shall obtain all required permits, approvals and shall pay all fees and perform all required coordination necessary for the new connection of the new underground fire service main to the existing underground fire service main. 1.26 SUBCONTRACTS A. Wherever hereinafter warranties of durability, operating capacity, proper functioning of equipment and the like are called for in this section of the specifications or wherever it is specified herein that the manufacturers shall furnish detail drawings, test certificates, or performance curves, that the manufacturer shall supervise the installation, keep it in repair for a stated period, or render other similar services, responsibility for the performance of the specified service under the actual conditions of installation shall be included as a part of this section of the specifications. B. The same shall apply to cases where special adjustment by manufacturer or other services are necessary to insure proper and efficient functioning of apparatus, and to meet manufacturer's warranty requirements, even though not specifically hereinafter called for. C. Where due to union regulations or trade agreements, any of the work shown of the drawings or specified herein is considered work of other trades, the work in question shall be subcontracted as a part of this section of the specifications and responsibility for the complete installation shall be included in this section of the specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, FITTINGS AND JOINTS A. Piping and fittings shall conform to the latest ANSI, ASTM, and NFPA and AWWA Standards including latest amendments and shall be in conformance with state and local codes and applicable sections of NFPA standards material standards. The fire protection piping shall be carried out to the existing city water supply by the sprinkler contractor and the final connection to the city water supply shall be by the sprinkler contractor. All work associated with the fire protection main throughout the site including connections to each building and to the city water supply shall be the responsibility of the sprinkler contractor. The sprinkler contractor shall coordinate with all civil drawings, details and specifications for the installation criteria, methods and materials. All work shall be performed in accordance with NFPA-24. B. Each length of pipe, each pipe fitting, trap, materials and/or device used in the respective system shall have cast, stamped or indelibly marked on it, the maker's name or mark, weight and quality of the product when such marking is required by the approved standard that applies. C. Service: Fire Protection/Sprinkler Above Ground (2 inches and smaller): 1. Pipe Material: Schedule 40 Black Steel with threaded ends, for wet pipe systems. Dry pipe systems shall be similar except for internally galvanized steel pipe. Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000- 11 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2. Fitting Material: Cast Iron 175 psi W.P. 3. Pipe Joint: cast iron Screwed fittings for wet pipe systems. D. Service: Fire Protection/Sprinkler Above Ground (2-1/2 inches and larger): 1. Pipe Material: a. Schedule 10 Black Steel with roll groove ends for wet pipe system and standpipe systems. Dry pipe systems shall be similar except for internally galvanized steel pipe. b. Fire Protection Pipe 2-1/2"through 5" shall have a minimum wall thickness of Schedule 10; .134"wall thickness for 6" pipe and .188"for 8" and 10" pipe. Dry pipe systems shall be similar except for internally galvanized steel pipe. 2. Fitting Material: Malleable Iron 175 psi W.P. 3. Pipe Joint: Roll-Grooved with Victaulic fittings E. Joints: 1. Joints in steel pipe above ground shall be threaded/flanged or a listed mechanical compression type coupling consisting of a neoprene collar, ductile iron coupling with zinc plated bolts and nuts all assembled to provide seal. 2. Steel, copper and brass pipe and fittings with threaded ends shall have IPS threads cut clean and true and in conformance with the ANSI Specifications 132-1 for taper threads. 3. Pipe roll grooving shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications contained in their latest published literature and NFPA 13. F. It shall be permitted, to the above listed fire protection piping systems, to furnish and install a Victaulic"Pressfit"system for pipe sizes 2" and smaller. The system shall incorporate schedule 5 steel pipe with a system of Victaulic"Pressfit" couplings, elbows, tees, reducers and adaptors necessary for a complete fire protection system. The"Pressfit"system and schedule 5 piping shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection service and rated for 175 psi working pressure. The Victaulic"Pressfit" system and associated piping shall be approved by the Owners Insurance Authority, and the Boston Fire Department prior to purchase and installation. G. All sprinkler piping in exposed areas shall be of a type suitable for painting. 2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers shall be installed, as required, to meet NFPA compliance as to location/spacing. B. Hanger material shall be compatible with piping materials with which it comes into contact. C. Hangers shall be installed, in addition to the above, at all changes of direction (horizontal and vertical), valves and equipment connections. Hangers shall be located so that their removal is not required to service, assemble or remove equipment. D. Horizontal runs may use band hangers up to 4" size. Piping larger than 4" shall be provided with clevis type. E. Vertical support shall be by means of riser clamps (anchors with split ring type allowable up to 2" size only)and adjustable pipe support with flange anchored to floor. Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000- 12 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA F. Rods, clamps and hangers shall be electro-galvanized coated. G. All nuts, inserts and hardware shall be stainless steel. H. Size of hanger rods shall not be less than the following: 3/4" to 1-1/2" pipe: 3/8" rod. 2"to 3-1/2" pipe: 1/2" rod. 4"to 6" pipe: 5/8" rod. 2.3 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. The new sprinkler system serving the Area indicated shall be automatic, wet type, as noted on Drawings and as manufactured by Victaulic, Viking or Grinnell. All sprinkler systems, valves, piping, hangers, supports, switches, and all associated equipment and material shall be UL listed and or FM approved for use with fire protection systems. All equipment as mentioned above shall be rated at 175 psi working pressure. 1. System shall be complete packaged with all necessary controls and including, but not limited to the following: a. Sprinkler Heads and Related Piping and Valves. b. Related Check and Shut-off Valves. C. Sprinkler system zone stations and controls including Inspector's Test Valves and Drains. d. Flow and tamper switches. e. Seismic Bracing. f. Hangers and supports. 2. System shall be in accordance with NFPA-13, NFPA-14 and 24 latest accepted editions and the rules and regulations of all local authorities and the owner's insurance authority and the Massachusetts State Building Code, 8th Edition. a. All building supply mains shall be per NFPA-24. b. All standpipe systems shall be per NFPA-14. B. Sprinkler Heads 1. Sprinkler heads shall be installed in accordance with architectural ceilings in all areas. Coordinate with the architectural ceiling plans and the electrical lighting plans for exact locations of ceilings and light fixtures and for laying out all final locations of sprinkler heads and piping. 2. Automatic Sprinklers: Sprinklers, in general, shall be automatic closed type with a 1/2" nominal size orifice. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, temperature rating of fusible elements shall be in accordance with NFPA-13. Automatic sprinklers of standard temperature rating (165 °F) shall be used except in areas above normal temperatures, will occur. In such area's intermediate temperature sprinklers (212 °F) shall be provided. Sprinkler heads, escutcheon plates and finishes shall be UL listed and or FM approved. 3. Sprinkler heads in unfinished ceiling areas shall be upright style with rough brass finish and glass bulb fusible elements as manufactured by Viking or equal. Sprinkler heads in finished ceiling areas shall be concealed type with escutcheon plate (all in chrome finish), and shall be manufactured by Viking or equal. . Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000- 13 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 4. High temperature sprinkler heads shall be used in laundry rooms, mechanical rooms and in close proximity to heat generating equipment. Distances from equipment and temperature ratings of sprinkler heads shall be in accordance with NFPA-13. 5. All sprinkler head finishes listed above shall be approved by the architect prior to the purchase and installation of any sprinkler work. The sprinkler contractor shall submit a list of proposed sprinkler head finishes to the architect for approval and shall obtain this approval prior to the commencement of any fire sprinkler work. 2.4 SPRINKLER SHOP DRAWINGS A. Provide shop drawings for approval for entire system. B. Provide a full set of hydraulic calculations and sprinkler system shop drawings. Hydraulic calculations and drawings shall be complete and correct in every respect in accordance with NFPA 13, NFPA-14 latest accepted editions. Final construction design shall be based on the sprinkler contractors' hydraulic calculations and sprinkler system shop drawings. All buildings as directed by the architect shall be equipped throughout with an approved automatic fire suppression system. C. Prepare working plans and hydraulic calculations stamped by a registered Professional Engineer of all entire systems in accordance with NFPA-13, NFPA-14 and shall have these drawings and calculations approved by the Boston Fire Department and the Owner's insuring authority and so stamped and signed, and submit such stamped and signed drawings to the Architect for approval. No work shall be installed until the drawings have been returned with the above approvals in addition to the Architect's approval. D. In addition to the sprinkler and standpipe system shop drawings, it shall be the responsibility of the sprinkler contractor to create a scale drawing of the layout of the fire sprinkler room and shall indicate all piping, valves, fittings, backflow preventer, wet and dry system risers and valves, drains, gauges and all devices required for a complete fire protection systems installation in accordance with NFPA-13. The sprinkler contractor shall carefully coordinate this room layout with the plumbing contractor to insure that both trades will fit into the space. The sprinkler contractor shall submit the sprinkler room layout to the plumbing contractor for coordination of the plumbing piping, valves and equipment. E. The sprinkler contractor shall conduct a new hydrant flow test at the site to obtain current flow and pressure data. The sprinkler contractor shall provide all labor, materials and coordination for the flow test. The sprinkler contractor shall coordinate with the local water department and local fire department prior to conducting the flow test for local authority requirements. The sprinkler contractor shall pay all local authority fees associated with the performing of the hydrant flow test. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 STRUCTURAL SYSTEM A. The sprinkler and standpipe systems shall be installed in such a way that no portion of the building structural system shall be altered in any way. In no case shall it be acceptable for any load bearing walls, beams, columns, bracing,joists or any portion of the building structural system to be cut, cored, drilled or altered in any way. Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000- 14 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3.2 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Comply with rules, codes, ordinances, regulations and requirements of all legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the whole, or any part of the work herein specified. These rules and regulations supplement this Specification and shall take precedence in any case of conflict. B. Materials and equipment furnished in connection with the installations shall be new and furnished in accordance with the requirements of the Standards of the NFPA Bulletin Nos.13 and they shall be the best grade and quality of their respective kinds, free from natural, manufacturing or construction flaws, deflects or irregularities and the finish, fitting and workmanship shall be equal to the highest commercial grade. C. Fire Protection System shall be installed in such a manner as to harmonize with the special architectural features of the building. All information required concerning the special architectural features of the building may be obtained from the Contract Documents. D. Systems shall include, but are not limited to, sprinkler heads and escutcheons, control valves, check valves, electric alarms, piping, fittings, hangers, drains, Inspector's test connections, flow switches, control valve monitor switches, signs and other identification markings as required. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Piping Installation: 1. Piping shall be installed straight and direct as possible forming right angles or parallel lines with building walls, other piping and neatly spaced. 2. The horizontal runs of piping, except where concealed in partitions, shall be installed as high as possible. 3. Piping or other apparatus shall not be installed in such a manner so as to not interfere with the full swing of the doors and access to other equipment. 4. The arrangement, positions and connections of pipes, drains, valves, and the like, indicated on the drawings shall be followed as closely as possible, but the right is reserved by the Architect to change locations and elevations to accommodate the work, without additional compensation for such change. 5. It shall be possible to drain the water from all sections of each aboveground sprinkler piping system. Pitch piping back to drain valves. 6. Screwed piping of brass or chrome plated brass shall be made up with special care to avoid marring or damaging pipe and fitting exterior and interior surfaces. 7. Small fittings shall be screwed up close to the shoulders of male threads. Lampwick, cord, wool, or any other similar material shall not be used to make up thread joints. 8. Screwed pipe and copper tubing shall be reamed smooth before installation. 9. Reducing fittings, unless otherwise approved in special cases, shall be provided in making reduction in size of pipe. Bushings will not be allowed. 10. Vertical risers shall be firmly supported by riser clamps, properly installed to relieve all weight from the fittings. 11. Any piece of pipe six inches or less in length shall be considered a nipple. 12. All fire protection service piping shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work to permit finished covering to be not less than 1 inch from other work. 13. The pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States of America and in accordance with the Commercial Standards, American National Standards Institute and American Society of Testing Materials. 14. All work associated with the grooving, threading, or cutting of piping shall be done outside of the building. Finished pipe sections shall be brought into the building and care shall be Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000- 15 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA taken so as not to damage pipe ends. No pipe cutting or grooving equipment will be allowed inside the building. 15. After all work and testing are complete and after acceptance of the system, the all debris, tools, equipment, etc., from the work areas both inside and outside the building. 16. Special care shall be given when making pipe joint connections so as not to produce leaks or dampness around the joints. During pressure testing, any dampness detected around joints and couplings shall be fixed by disassembling the joint or coupling, thoroughly cleaning and drying the pipe and couplings, reassembling the joint or coupling, and re-testing the sprinkler system. 17. Victaulic"Pressfit"system shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and all applicable codes. B. Hanger Installation: 1. All piping shall be supported from the building structure by means of approved hangers and supports, to maintain proper grading and pitching of lines, to prevent vibration and to secure piping in place, and shall be so arranged as to provide for expansion and contraction. 2. Vertical hanger rods to support piping from the structure or supplementary steel shall not exceed four feet in total length vertically, provide factory fabricated channels and all associated accessories. 3. Friction clamps shall be installed at the base of the risers and at each floor(above or below floor slabs). Friction clamps installed above floor slabs shall not be supported from or rest on floor sleeves. 4. Provide hangers at a maximum distance of two feet from all changes in direction (horizontal and vertical), on both sides of concentrated loads (equipment)and at valves. 5. Hangers, in general, for all horizontal piping shall be A Band type hangers for piping up to 4" size and Clevis type for piping 5" and larger. 6. Provide all supplementary steel including factory fabricated channels and associated accessories throughout both suspended and floor mounted, subject to the approval of the Architect. 7. Wire, tape or wood fastenings for shims or support of any pipe or tubing shall not be used. 8. Remove all rust from the ferrous galvanized hanger equipment(hangers and rods) and apply one coat of galvanized paint immediately after erection. 9. Piping at all equipment and each control valve shall be supported to prevent strains or distortions in the connected equipment and control valves. Piping and equipment shall be supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without requiring additional support after these items are removed. 10. All piping shall be independently supported from the building structure and not from the piping, ductwork, conduit or ceiling suspension systems of other systems. C. Installation of hangers which permit wide lateral motion of any pipe will not be acceptable. 1. All hangers in contact with uninsulated piping shall be compatible with piping material. 2. Installation of Sleeves, Inserts and Escutcheons: 3. Sleeves in floors shall set one (1) inch above the finished floor surface or as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Sleeves through interior masonry or non-masonry walls or partitions shall be set flush with the finished surfaces of the wall or partition. 5. Provide field drilling for inserts required for work under this section of the specifications. 6. Each interior wall or partition sleeve shall be packed with foam, glass wool or approved substitute flush with each face of wall. 7. Escutcheons shall be installed around all exposed piping passing through floor, wall or ceiling. Escutcheons shall fit snugly around the bare or insulated pipe. Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000- 16 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS IRON AND STEEL A. Provide steel supports and hangers as shown on the drawings or required to support valves, pipe, ductwork, and other equipment or materials. B. All work shall be cut, assembled, welded and finished by skilled mechanics. Welds shall be ground smooth. Stands, brackets, and framework shall be properly sized and firmly constructed. C. Measurements shall be taken on the job and worked out to suit adjoining and connecting work. All work shall be by experienced metal working mechanics. Members shall be straight and true and accurately fitted. Scale, rust, and burrs shall be removed. Welded joints shall be ground smooth where exposed. Drilling, cutting and fitting shall be done as required to properly install the work and accommodate the work of other trades as directed by them. D. Members shall be generally welded, except that bolting may be used for field assembly where welding would be impractical. Welders shall be skilled. E. All shop fabricated iron and steel work shall be cleaned and dried and given a shop coat of paint on all surfaces and in all openings and crevices. F. Submit details of all equipment supports and attachments for approval. 3.5 TESTING A. General: 1. Provide all labor, materials, instruments, devices and power required for testing. The tests shall be performed in the presence and to the satisfaction of the Architect, Fire Department and the Owners Insurance Authority, and such other parties as may have legal jurisdiction. No piping in any location shall be closed up, furred in, or covered before testing. 2. Where portions of piping systems are to be covered or concealed before completion of the project, those portions shall be tested separately in the manner specified herein for the respective entire system. 3. Any piping or equipment that has been left unprotected and subject to mechanical or other injury in the opinion of the Architect shall be retested in part or in whole as directed. 4. The Architect retains the right to request a recheck or resetting of any instrument during the guarantee period at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Repair, or if directed, replace any defective work with new work without extra charge to the Contract. Repeat tests as directed, until the work is proven to meet the requirements specified herein. 6. Restore to its finished condition any work, damaged or disturbed, provided by other trades and engage the original trade to do the work of restoration to the damaged or disturbed work. 7. Caulking of screwed joints or holes in piping will not be acceptable. 8. Notify the Architect, Boston Fire Department, The Owner, the Owners Insurance Authority, and any inspectors having jurisdiction, a minimum of 48 hours in advance of making any required tests so that arrangements may be made for their presence to witness his scheduled tests. B. Sprinkler Systems: Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000- 17 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1. Testing shall be in accordance with NFPA-13, 13, and NFPA-24, latest accepted edition. 2. Each system shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 200 PSI for two hours. 3. Flushing shall be performed at a minimum rate of 390 GPM for systems supplied by a 4" alarm valve and 880 GPM for systems with a 6" alarm valve. No portion of the fire protections systems shall be connected to the site water supplies until the site water mains have been flushed and Flushing reports have been provided to the sprinkler trade by the site trade. 4. All water flow detecting devices and circuits shall be flow tested through the inspector's test connection and activate within five minutes of initiation. 3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. At the completion of the work, all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned. All equipment, pipe, valves and fittings shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings and sludge which may have accumulated by operation of the system for testing. B. Any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of the building, its finish, or furnishings, due to failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired at no increase in Contract costs. C. All items of equipment shall be thoroughly inspected and any items dented, scratched or otherwise damaged in any manner shall be replaced or repaired and painted to match the original finish. All items so repaired and refinished shall be brought to the attention of the Construction Manager for inspection and approval. D. Continuously remove debris from work areas and remove debris, waste, scrap, excess materials, etc., from the work on completion in any area. 3.7 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Provide any and all special tools, recommended by the manufacturer of items furnished, noted as not being commonly available. 3.8 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL A. Upon completion of the work, furnish to the Owner in duplicate, certificates of inspection and/or approval from state and local inspection authorities having jurisdiction indicating the installed systems compliance to their requirements and the sprinkler installer fire protection engineer affidavit for each building. 3.9 PAINTING AND EARTHWORK A. All painting shall be provided under Section 09 90 00—Painting. B. All painting and earthwork shall be provided in accordance with Division 31 — Earthwork END OF SECTION 210000 Gienapp Design FIRE PROTECTION 210000- 18 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 FILED SUB-BIDS A. Plumbing is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under Part D, Item 2 of the Form for General Bid B. All sub-bids shall be submitted on the Form for Sub-Bid furnished by the Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the Massachusetts General Laws, as amended. C. Sub-Bids must be filed with the Awarding Authority in a sealed envelope, before the time stipulated, on the date stipulated in the Invitation for Bids. D. Specific information relating the sub-bidders is set forth in the Contract Documents, under the heading"Notice to All Bidders, including Sub-Bidders"and the attention of sub-bidders is directed thereto. E. The Trade Contractor shall perform the complete trade work, including the following listed sub- trade classes of work, with employees on its own payroll unless the Trade Contractor identifies on the bid form, the name of a sub-trade subcontractor that will perform each of the following classes of sub-trade work and the corresponding sub-trade subcontract sum. F. The work to be done under this section is shown on Drawings numbered: P001 thru P101. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Include the General Conditions, Modifications to the General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 01000 as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect Work of this Section whether or not such Work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate Work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all Work under Contract. D. It is the intent of the Specifications and the Drawings to require that all the material, labor, and equipment be furnished complete in every respect, and that this Contractor shall provide all material, labor, and equipment needed and usually furnished in connection with such systems to provide a complete installation including all demolition, disposal, and patching of adjacent surfaces. Materials, equipment, and articles incorporated in the Work shall be new and of the best grade of their respective kinds. E. Examine all Drawings and all Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work and this Section. The exact scope of work cannot be determined without a thorough review of all specification sections and other contract documents. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000 - 1 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA A. Work in this section includes providing labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for a complete and safe installation in accordance with the Contract Documents and all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Building 1. Provide demolition of all plumbing fixtures as indicated on drawings. 2. Provide all required coring, cutting and patching for the renovation. 3. Provide all plumbing fixtures as indicated. 4. Provide all required domestic water, sanitary and vent connections to all new fixtures. Provide and extend from the existing domestic water, sanitary and vent systems, connections to the new plumbing fixtures for complete and operational plumbing systems. 5. Provide all staging, hoisting and firestopping. C. General 1. Valves 2. Sleeves, inserts, hangers and accessories 3. Pipe identification and valve tags 4. Flanges, union fittings and couplings 5. Firestopping at piping and sleeves 6. Cleaning and testing 7. Cutting, coring and patching 8. Supplementary steel for piping and equipment supports 9. Operating and maintenance manuals 10. Guarantee 11. Necessary supervision and coordination information to any other trades involved in the construction, to accommodate space, support or service requirements for equipment and piping provided under this Section of the Specifications. 12. All materials and labor necessary for installation and operation of equipment, furnished by others, requiring plumbing services and/or work that would fall under the jurisdiction or review of the plumbing inspector. 13. Cutting and Patching as outlined in this section. 14. When open-flame or spark producing tools such as blower torches, welding equipment, etc., are required in the process of executing the work, the General Contractor shall be notified not less than 24 hours in advance of the time that the work is to begin and the location where the work is to be performed. Provide, where necessary, fire protective covering and maintain a constant non-working fire watch where work is being performed and until completed. 15. Examine all Project Specifications and Drawings for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. 1.4 RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS A. Principal classes of work related to the work of this Section are listed below, and are specified to be performed under the indicated sections of the Specifications. Refer to the indicated sections for description of the extent and nature of the indicated work, and for coordination with related trades. This listing may not include all related work items, and it is the responsibility of the contractor to fully coordinate the work of this Section with that of all other trades. 1. Section 07 84 13— Firestopping 2. Section 03 33 000- Concrete Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000 -2 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1.5 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trades, or federal standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. The date of the standard is that in effect as the Bid date, except when a specific date is specified. C. Schedule of References: 1. ANSI American National Standards Institute 2. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 3. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 4. AWWA American Water Works Association 5. IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers 6. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 7. PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute 8. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 9. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 10. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 11. MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to the requirements of the submittals, Section 01 33 000, for schedule and form of all submittals. Coordinate this submittal with submittals for all other finishes. B. Materials List: Before purchasing materials for the work, submit to the Architect/Engineer a complete list showing (1) the materials specified, and (2) the equivalent materials proposed for use, including description of product, if the Plumbing Contractor desires to use materials other than those specified. 1. All materials shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer before commitment for materials is made. Intention of using specified materials shall not relieve the Contractor from submitting the items listed herein. C. Proposed Products List: 1. Hangers and Supports 2. Piping, Fittings, Unions and Couplings 3. Valves 4. Insulation D. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. E. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. F. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on each product with submittal. 1.7 CODES, ORDINANCES, AND PERMITS Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000 -3 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA A. Installation of systems and equipment provided under this section shall be done in strict accordance with the Massachusetts State Building and Plumbing Codes,with local supplements, Department of Environmental Protection Agency, Massachusetts Architectural Access Board and any and all state and local requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. All materials provided under this Contract shall be approved for use in the State of Massachusetts, and installed in strict accordance with the Massachusetts State Plumbing Code. C. Give all notices,file all plans, obtain all permits, pay all fees and licenses and obtain all necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Deliver all certificates of inspection to the authorities having jurisdiction. No work shall be covered before examination and approval by Architect/Engineer, inspectors, and authorities having jurisdiction. Replace imperfect or condemned work conforming to requirements, satisfactory to Architect, and without extra cost to the Owner. If work is covered before due inspection and approval, the installing contractors shall pay costs of uncovering and reinstalling the covering, whether it meets contract requirements or not. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct work in sequence under provisions of Division 01. 1.9 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to Division 01, of the Specifications for record drawings and procedures to be provided under this section. 1.10 JURISDICTIONAL DISPUTES A. In order to avoid any jurisdictional disputes and work stoppage that could arise during the completion of the work shown on the Drawings or as specified herein, the Plumbing Contractor will be held responsible for subletting any work shown or specified herein, but not classified as plumbing work. 1.11 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until it has been tested and accepted. B. Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including theft. All materials and equipment damaged or stolen shall be repaired or replaced with equal material or equipment. C. Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers. Protect work and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or workmen under this Section and make good damage thus caused. 1.12 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A. Life safety shall be a primary consideration. The contractor shall provide all required and prudent material, labor and equipment to comply with applicable safety regulations. Further,the Plumbing Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000 -4 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA Contractor shall similarly provide all material, labor and equipment to comply with reasonable or generally accepted safety precautions as directed by the Owner or the Architect. B. Comply with all of the safety requirements of OSHA throughout the entire construction period of the project. C. Furnish, place and maintain proper guards for prevention of accidents and any other necessary construction required to secure safety of life and property. D. Perform work only in areas of the building as approved by the Owner or his representative. Personnel and equipment access to the site, laydown areas, parking areas and areas of work shall only be as designated and allowed by the Owner. E. Also refer to Division 01, Safety Requirements. 1.13 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. It is the intention of the Specifications and Drawings to call for complete, finished work, tested and ready for continuous operation. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the Drawings, but mentioned in the Specifications or vice-versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor without additional expense to the Owner. B. The Drawings are generally diagrammatic. The locations of all items that are not definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only. The exact locations must be determined at the project and shall have the approval of the Architect before being installed. The Plumbing Contractor shall follow Drawings, including his shop drawings, in laying out work and shall check the Drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions. Where space conditions appear inadequate, notify the Architect before proceeding with the installation. The Plumbing Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. C. Refer to the Architectural, Structural, and Electrical plans and coordinate location of all plumbing equipment and piping. D. Size of pipes and methods of running them are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. To carry out the true intent and purpose of the Drawings, all necessary parts to make complete approved working systems ready for use, shall be furnished without extra charge. All work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid being unsightly. E. Should it appear that there is a real or an apparent discrepancy between the drawings and specification, it shall be assumed that the Plumbing Contractor based his bid on doing work in a more expensive manner. 1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare and submit maintenance and operating manuals as described in, PROJECT CLOSEOUT, section of specifications. Submit six (6) complete hard copy sets and digital copy on a thumb drive, of operation and maintenance manuals. Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000 -5 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA B. Table of Contents: 1. Introduction: a. Explanation of Manual and its use. b. Description of Piping Systems. 2. System Operation 3. Maintenance a. Recommended List of Spare Parts: Furnish two (2) typed sets of instructions for ordering spare parts with sectional views of the fittings or equipment showing parts numbered or labeled to facilitate ordering replacements. Each set shall include a list with itemized prices of those parts recommended to be kept on hand as spares, as well as the name and address of where they may be obtained. b. System draining and filling instructions. 4. Manufacturer's Literature: a. All items as listed under Submittals, Paragraph 1.05. 1.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. All cutting and patching necessary for the proper installation of work to be performed under this Section and subsections shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All cutting and patching associated with demolition work necessary for the installation of work under this section shall be by the General Contractor. B. All work shall be fully coordinated with all phases of construction, in order to minimize the requirements for cutting and patching. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall form all chases or openings for the installation of his own work, or shall cut the same in existing work and shall see that all sleeves or forms are in the work and properly set in ample time to prevent delays. He shall see that all such chases, openings, and sleeves are located accurately and are of the proper size and shape and shall consult with the Architect and the Contractors or Contractors concerned in reference to this work. In so doing, he shall confine the cutting to the smallest extent possible consistent with the work to be done. In no case shall piers or structural members be cut without the approval of the Architect/Engineer. D. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully fit around, close up, repair, patch, and point around the work specified herein to match the adjacent surfaces and to the entire satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. E. The Plumbing Contractor shall fill and patch all openings or holes left in the existing structures by the removal of existing equipment by himself. F. All of this work shall be carefully done by workmen competent to do such work and with the proper and smallest tools applicable. G. Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the Plumbing Contractor responsible therefore. Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000 -6 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA H. Provide all cutting and patching work required for installation of materials and equipment under this section of the specifications, in such a manner so as to leave the work complete and in a condition that matches the corresponding area. I. When, in order to accommodate the work required under this section of the specifications,finished materials of other trades must be cut or fitted, furnish the necessary drawings and information to the trades whose materials must be cut or fitted. J. Do all required drilling and cutting of holes in concrete walls and floors for the installation of sleeves and supports provided under this section of the specification. K. After installation of pipe lines, the Contractor shall neatly patch, repair, and replace work where damaged, removed or altered for pipe line installation. This work shall be similar and equal in quality to the work removed or damaged, unless otherwise shown or specified. Such work shall include patching of masonry work, and wherever any such patching work is indicated on drawings or otherwise required. L. The fire resistance rating of floors, walls, and ceilings shall be maintained. UL listed firestopping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Firestopping shall be performed in strict conformance with Division 07. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. Submit manufacturer's standard replacement warranties for material and equipment furnished under this Section. Such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all liabilities which the manufacturer and Contractor may have by law or by provisions of the Contract Documents. All warranties shall be submitted prior to Final Payment. B. All materials, equipment and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against all defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1)year commencing with the date of Substantial Completion. Any failure due to defective material, equipment or workmanship which may develop shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner including all damage to areas, materials and other systems resulting from such failures. C. Guarantee that all elements of each system meet the specified performance requirements as set forth herein or as indicated on the Drawings. D. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of the failure of any part of the systems during the guarantee period, the affected parts shall be replaced. Any equipment requiring excessive service shall be considered defective and shall be replaced. 1.17 OBTAINING INFORMATION A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipment that is to be furnished and installed. Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the work and to complete the project. 1.18 GIVING INFORMATION Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000 -7 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA A. Keep fully informed as to the size and shape and location of all openings required for all apparatus and give full information to all other Contractors. Furnish all supports required for installation of apparatus herein specified. 1.19 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The work shall be so performed that the progress of the entire building construction including all other trades shall not be delayed nor interfered with. Materials and apparatus shall be installed as fast as conditions of the building will permit and must be installed promptly when and as desired. B. Confer with all other trades relative to location of all apparatus and equipment to be installed and select locations so as not to conflict with work of other Sections. Any conflicts shall be referred immediately to the Architect/Engineer for decision to prevent delay in installation of work. All work and materials placed in violation of this clause shall be readjusted to the Architect's satisfaction, at no expense to the Owner. C. Where work of this section will be installed in close proximity to work of other sections or where there is evidence that the work of this section will interfere with work of other sections, assist in working out space conditions to make satisfactory adjustment. Prepare and submit for approval 1/8-inch scale or larger working drawings and sections, clearly showing how this work is to be installed in relation to the work of other sections. If the work of this section is installed before coordinating with other trades or so as to cause interference with work of other trades, make changes necessary to protect conditions without extra charge. D. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus and give information in advance to build openings into the work. Furnish and set in place all sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals. E. All distribution systems which require pitch or slope such as storm and sanitary drains and water piping shall have the right of way over those which do not. Confer with other trades as to the location of pipes, ducts, lights and apparatus and install work to avoid interferences. F. The Plumbing Contractor shall,with the approval of the Architect and without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in his work as required by normal structural interferences, or by interference with work of other trades, or for proper execution of the work. G. The Plumbing Contractor shall protect all materials and work of other trades from damage that may be caused by his work and shall make good any damages so caused. H. This contractor shall submit Requests for Information (RFI's)regarding the work of this section in accordance with the provisions of Division 01. 1.20 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS A. All equipment and material must be approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to use. Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process offered for consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified and only if the term "approved equal" appears. The request for each substitution must be accompanied by complete specifications together with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials, equipment or process. Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000 -8 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA B. If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, the Plumbing Contractor shall bear the cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said substitution. C. All materials, equipment and accessories provided under this section shall be new and unused products of recognized manufacturers as approved by the Massachusetts State Board of Plumbers and Gas Fitters. 1.21 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL A. Upon completion of all work, furnish, in duplicate, certificates of inspections from the manufacturers stating that authorized factory engineers have inspected and tested the operation of their respective equipment and found same to be in satisfactory operating condition. 1.22 SUPERVISION A. Supply the service of an experienced and competent supervisor who shall be in charge of the plumbing work at the site. 1.23 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All manufactured materials shall be delivered to the site in original packages or containers bearing the manufacturer's labels and product identification. B. Protect materials against dampness. Store off floors, under cover,and adequately protected from damage. C. Deliver products to site and store and protect same under the provisions of Division 1. D. Thoroughly inspect all plumbing equipment and materials upon receipt at the job site for damage and correctness. 1.24 ACCESSIBILITY A. All work shall be installed so that parts requiring inspection, operation, maintenance and repair are readily accessible. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, but changes of substantial magnitude shall not be made prior to written approval from the Architect. 1.25 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels for walls and ceilings at locations indicated on drawings or as required to permit access for adjustment, removal, replacement and servicing of all concealed plumbing equipment requiring access and all other items requiring maintenance and adjustment. In addition to where indicated on this Drawing, access doors shall be required for access to each concealed piping system isolation valve. Access panels shall be in strict conformance with Division 8. All access panels shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. B. Installation shall be by the General Contractor. Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000 -9 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA C. All access panels shall be located and positioned so that the equipment can be easily reached, and the size shall be sufficient for this purpose (min. 12" x 12"). 1.26 SLEEVES, INSERTS, ANCHOR BOLTS, AND PLATES A. Be responsible for the location of and the maintaining in proper position all sleeves, inserts and anchor bolts supplied and/or set in place. In the event that failure to do so requires cutting and patching of finished work, it shall be done at this Contractor's expense without any additional cost to the Owner. B. Sleeves passing through fire walls and fire rated floors and barriers, shall be made tight using approved caulking or fireproofing materials as necessary. Fire rated material shall be UL listed and shall match the rating of the wall, floor or barrier penetrated. C. The fire resistance rating of floors, walls, and ceilings shall be maintained. UL listed firestopping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.27 SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL, CHANNELS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide all supplementary steel, channels and supports required for the proper installation, mounting and support of all plumbing equipment, piping, etc., required by the Specifications. B. Supplementary steel and channels shall be firmly connected to building construction in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer. C. The type and size of the supporting channels and supplementary steel shall be determined by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be of sufficient strength and size to allow only a minimum deflection in conformance with the manufacturer's requirements for loading. 1.28 DEFINITIONS A. As used in this Section, the following items are understood to have the following meaning: 1. Work shall mean all labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories and all other items required for a proper and complete installation. 2. Concealed shall mean hidden from sight in chases, furred-in spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, embedded in construction or in a crawl space. 3. Exposed shall mean not installed underground or concealed as defined above. 4. Provide shall mean furnish and install. 5. Contractor shall mean plumbing contractor. 1.29 HOISTING, SCAFFOLDING AND PLANKING A. The work to be done under this Section of the Specifications shall include the furnishing, set-up and maintenance of all derricks, hoisting machinery, scaffolds, staging and planking as required for the work. 1.30 COORDINATION Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000- 10 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA A. Work shall be performed in cooperation with other trades on the project and so scheduled as to allow speedy and efficient completion of the project. B. Furnish to all other trades advance information on location and size of all equipment, frames, boxes, sleeves, and openings needed for the work under this section of the specifications, and also furnish layout information and shop drawings necessary to permit trades affected by the work under this section of the specifications to install their work properly coordinated and without delay. C. Where there is evidence that work installed under this section of the specifications interferes with the work of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make satisfactory adjustments. D. With the approval of the Architect/Engineer and without extra cost to the Owner, make reasonable modifications in work specified under this section of the specifications required to coordinate with normal structural interferences, lights, diffusers, and ductwork or for proper execution of specified work. E. If work is installed before coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such trades, make all necessary changes in work under this section of the specifications at no additional cost to the Contract. F. Protect all materials and work of other trades from damage that may be caused by the work required under this section of the specifications and be responsible for repairing any damages caused by such work without any additional cost to the Contract. G. Where work of this section will be installed in close proximity to work of other sections or where there is evidence that the work of this section will interfere with work of other sections or existing conditions, assist in working out space conditions to make satisfactory adjustment. Prepare and submit for approval 1/8-inch scale or larger working drawings and sections, clearly showing how this work is to be installed in relation to the work of other sections. If the work of this section is installed before coordinating with other trades or so to cause interference with work of other trades, make changes necessary to protect conditions without extra charge. H. The plumbing contractor shall carefully coordinate with all existing conditions at the site while preparing the coordination drawings. All work shown on the plumbing contractor's coordination drawings shall be fully coordinated with all existing conditions at the site to insure that all work shall fit in the spaces. The plumbing contractor shall make reasonable changes to the contract drawings in order to accommodate existing conditions without extra charge. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 1. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion- resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISP1310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. b. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000- 11 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA B. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. 2.2 POTABLE AND NON-POTABLE COLD-WATER PIPING A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube. 1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. B. Basis of Design: Nibco or approved equal. 2.3 VALVES A. Valves in the interior domestic water piping systems (cold water, hot water, and hot water return) shall be as manufactured by Conbraco, Apollo, Milwaukee or approved equal. Manufacturer's model numbers used herein are intended as a guide to quality and type of valve to be provided. 1. Ball valves, 2 inches and smaller: bronze body, solder ends, equal to Apollo 77-100/200 series, TFE seats, lever handle. 2.4 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Unless otherwise specified herein, unions for copper and brass piping two inches and smaller shall be 125 pounds (steam working pressure) brass ground joint type. Larger than 2 inches in diameter shall be 150 pounds flat faced brass flanges conforming to ANSI Standard B16.24. Flanges shall have copper clad steel bolts and nuts and 1/16-inch minimum thickness red rubber full faced gaskets. 1. Where brass flanges and ferrous flanges are to be joined,ferrous flanges shall be full faced. 2. Mating of ferrous and non-ferrous flanges shall be separated with rubber gaskets (1/16- inch minimum thickness) and Teflon liners installed in the bolt holes. Bolt holes shall be drilled to receive the Teflon liners. Physical contact between the ferrous and non-ferrous flanges including the bolts, nuts, and washers will not be permitted. 3. Unions or flanges shall be installed at all equipment connections. 2.5 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts - CO: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Zurn or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. C. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000- 12 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Raised-head cast-iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. B. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts FCO: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Zurn or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. C. Watts Drainage Products Inc. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for heavy-duty, adjustable housing cleanout. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 6. Clamping Device: Not required. 7. Outlet Connection: No-hub. 8. Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads. 9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze. 11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 12. Top Loading Classification: Light Duty. 13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to clean out. C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts—WCO: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. g. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Raised-head brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. 8. Wall Access: Round nickel-bronze wall-installation frame and cover. 2.6 FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains— FD-x as indicated on the plumbing schedule: Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000- 13 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Zurn or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. C. Watts Drainage Products Inc. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.6.3. 3. Pattern: Floor drain. 4. Body Material: Gray iron. 5. Seepage Flange: Required. 6. Anchor Flange: Not required. 7. Clamping Device: Not required. 8. Outlet: Bottom. 9. Backwater Valve: Not required. 10. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required. 11. Sediment Bucket: Required. 12. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze. 13. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Rough bronze. 14. Top Shape: Square. 15. Dimensions of Top or Strainer: Not Required 16. Top Loading Classification: Light Duty. 17. Funnel: Not required. 18. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection. 19. Trap Material: Cast iron. 20. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap. 21. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection. B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings: 1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet. 2.7 PLUMIBNG FIXTURE A. Refer to plumbing fixtures schedule drawing number P001. 2.8 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. All piping shall be rigidly supported from the building structures by means of approved hangers and supports. Piping shall be supported to maintain required grading and pitching of line, to prevent vibration and to secure piping in place, and shall be arranged so as to provide for expansion and contraction. In no case shall risers or mains contact building structures. Seismic restraints shall be provided on gas piping systems as required. B. All materials specified in this section which occur above suspended ceilings shall be supported directly from the building structures. The suspended ceiling system shall not be utilized to support any plumbing materials. All hangers, inserts and supports shall be Carpenter Patterson, Calco, Walworth, or equal. Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000- 14 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA C. All hangers shall be secured to approved adjustable type, stainless steel inserts wherever possible and practicable. Field drilling,where required, shall be by the Plumbing Contractor. The use of explosives is prohibited. D. All sanitary, waste, vent, storm drain and water pipes shall have friction clamps at each floor. E. Hangers shall be installed, as required, to meet code compliance as to location/spacing and Manufacturer's Standardization Society(MSS) Standard Practice Bulletins SP-58 and 69. F. Hanger material shall be compatible with piping materials with which it comes into contact unless otherwise noted. G. Hangers shall be installed, in addition to the above, at all changes of direction (horizontal and vertical), valves and equipment connections. Hangers shall be located so that their removal is not required to service, assemble or remove equipment. H. Horizontal runs may use Type 1X band hangers up to 4" size. Piping larger than 4" shall be provided with clevis type. I. Vertical support shall be by means of riser clamps (anchors with split ring type allowable up to 2" size only) and adjustable pipe support with flange anchored to floor. J. Where three or more pipes are running parallel to each other, factory fabricated gang pipe hangers with pipe saddle clips or rollers may be used in lieu of the hereinbefore specified hangers. These hangers shall be sized to provide for insulation protectors as hereinafter specified. Pipe saddle clips shall be not less than 16-gauge metal. Where pipe rollers are provided for insulated copper piping, insulation protectors shall be provided at each set of rollers and filled with a section of heavy density fiberglass pipe covering that extends a minimum of 12" beyond the roller. K. Insulation protectors(shields)for horizontal piping shall be constructed of galvanized steel formed to a 180-degree arc and 12 inches long, 18 gauge for hangers 5 inches in size and smaller, 16 gauge for hangers larger than 5 inches in size. L. Rods, clamps and hangers shall be electro-ga Ivan ized coated. M. Valve and piping supports,from the floor, shall be adjustable pipe support and complete with pipe standard and flange, anchored to floor. Supports shall be installed at each control valve, riser tee or elbow and where any unsupported section exceeds 4'-0" in length measured along piping centerline. 2.9 SLEEVES A. All pipes passing through floors, walls, or partitions shall be provided with sleeves having an internal diameter with a minimum of two inches larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation on covered lines. B. Sleeves through outside walls and slabs on grade shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with a 150-pound steel slip on welding flanges, welded at the center of the sleeve and shall be painted with one coat of bitumastic paint, inside and outside. C. Sleeves through masonry floors and interior masonry walls shall be Schedule 40, black, steel pipe. Sleeves through interior non-masonry walls or partitions shall be 22-gauge galvanized sheet steel. Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000- 15 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA D. The sleeves through outside walls and slab on grade shall be provided with pipe to wall penetration closures. Seals shall be mechanical type of interlocking rubber links shaped to fill space between pipe and sleeve. Links shall be assembled with bolts to form a belt around the pipe with pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. After seal assembly is positioned, tightening of bolts will provide watertight seal. The Plumbing Contractor shall determine the required inside diameter of each individual sleeve before ordering, fabricating or installing. The inside diameter of each sleeve shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and Link-Seal to assure a watertight joint. E. Sleeves through walls shall terminate flush with face of wall. Sleeves through floor shall terminate 1" above finished floor. F. Required fire resistance of floors and walls shall be maintained where penetrations occur. Fire stopping at sleeves shall be installed per manufacturer recommendations. Fire stopping material shall be UL listed for the service and fire rating. Provide asbestos-free firestopping material capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, gases, and temperature. Provide noncombustible firestopping that is nontoxic to human beings during installation or during fire conditions. Devices and equipment for firestopping service shall be UL FRD listed or FM P7825 approved for use with applicable construction, and penetrating items. 1. Fire Hazard Classification: Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less, a smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with UL 723 or UL listed and accepted. 2. Firestopping Rating: Firestopping materials shall be UL FRD listed or FM P7825 approved for "F" and "T" ratings at least equal to fire-rating of fire wall or floor in which penetrated openings are to be protected,except that"F"and"T"ratings may be 3 hours for firestopping in through-penetrations of 4-hour fire rated wall or floor. G. Escutcheons shall be provided with a set screw to properly hold escutcheon in place and provided at all exposed floor and wall penetrations. Escutcheons on C.P. piping shall be chrome plated. 2.10 INSULATION A. General: The pipe covering specified herein for piping system shall be provided in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, the best practice of the trade and to the full intent of this specification. 1. The sealers, tapes, adhesives and mastics used in conjunction with the installation of the pipe covering specified herein shall possess the maximum possible fire-safe qualities available and shall be of a type approved by Factory Mutual, Factory Insurance Association or National Fire Protection Association. 2. Valves, fittings, flanges and accessories shall have the same thickness of pipe covering applied as the adjacent pipe. Pipe covering for these items shall be factory PVC molded type (Zeston or approved equal). 3. Longitudinal seams and butt joint shall be sealed with a fire retardant, vapor barrier adhesive. B. All Interior Water Systems Piping 1. All interior water piping systems shall be insulated and shall be 4-pound density,fiberglass with factory applied white, fire retardant, reinforced, vapor barrier jacket, 1" inch thick for piping up to 1-1/4" and 1'/2" for piping 1-1/2" and larger. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves. Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000- 16 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2. Ends of insulation at termination points shall be sealed to the pipe with a pre-molded PVC type fitting. Pipe fittings and valves shall be provided with pre-molded PVC covers with fiberglass inserts. 3. Pipe insulation in all mechanical rooms, non-conditioned wet areas and the gymnasium and in all areas where the piping will be exposed to view shall be provided with 20 mil. PVC white continuous covers in addition to the vapor barrier Jacket. Fittings and seams shall be solvent welded. Pipe fittings and valves shall be similarly insulated and covered. C. Insulation at hangers shall be protected with galvanized steel shields. D. Fire Hazard Rating: Insulation materials, coatings and other accessories shall individually have a fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for fuel contributed and smoke developed. Ratings shall be determined by U.L. "Test Method for Fire Hazard Classification of Building Materials", No. 823 or NFPA No. 225 or ASTM E84. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 DEMOLITION A. The existing facility will be occupied during demolition work. B. Where sections of a system are to be removed and the system serves other areas of the building that are outside the immediate scope of the work, perform the following: 1. Coordinate the temporary shutdown of the system with the Owner's representative. 2. Install supports in the remaining active sections of the system as required by the removal of nearby supports associated with the demolition. 3. Isolate the system. 4. Cap the remaining system section, leaving the remainder of the system active. C. Provide temporary shoring or bracing during the demolition work to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of the system or adjacent systems due to the work. D. Promptly repair any damage caused to adjacent facilities or areas that are designated to remain at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Materials/Equipment: 1. Coordinate with all Contractors to provide disconnection prior to equipment removal. 2. Remove material/equipment by unfastening at the supports or attachments. Then remove the attachments from the building, leaving no component of the original installation. 3. The Owner shall have the option to choose to take possession of the equipment or not. If the Owner chooses not to take possession of the equipment, remove and drop equipment/materials to floor for removal/disposal by the General Contractor. 4. Exercise care with equipment that is to be relocated or turned over to the Owner, examine the equipment before removal in the presence of the Owner's representative to determine its condition. Make a record of any marks,etc. by a photograph or videotape acknowledged by the Owner's representative. 5. Install relocated equipment to ensure no damage. 6. Equipment to be turned over to the Owner: Deliver to an on-site location designated by the Owner, and obtain acknowledgment of receipt in good condition the following equipment. Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000- 17 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA F. Remove existing equipment and appurtenances as indicated on demolition plans and as required to install the new systems. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. General 1. All equipment and piping provided under this Section of the Specifications shall be marked for ease of identification. 2. Marking shall be done using self-adhering labels applied to clean, smooth surfaces. All lettering shall have a sharply contrasting background for ease of identification. Colors shall be in accordance with ANSI Standards. Samples of stickers together with color schedules shall be submitted for approval. SCHEDULE OF PIPING IDENTIFICATION Service Legend Background Color Domestic Cold-Water Piping Cold Water Blue Non-Potable Cold-Water Piping Irrigation Yellow B. Equipment 1. Equipment marking shall be prominently located on the normally visible side of the equipment. 2. Equipment identification designations shall be taken from equipment schedules as indicated on the Drawings. C. Pipe Identification 1. Provide color coded pipe identification markers on all piping in the building installed under this Section. Pipe markers shall be heavy plastic faced cloth labels with heat resistant backing, "Set Mark" by Seton Nameplate Corporation, Zipper Tubing Co., or equal by the W. H. Brady Company or approved equal. 2. Provide an arrow marker with each pipe content marker to indicate the direction of flow. 3. Piping mains shall be labeled at 20-foot intervals and on entrance and exit from the Mechanical Room,adjacent to each valve and at both sides of wall penetrations. This work shall be done after finish painting has been completed. 4. The following color coding shall be used with names in black letters on backgrounds indicated: 5. In general, a 2" high legend shall be used for pipe lines 4" diameter and larger, and a W, high legend shall be used for pipe lines 3" diameter and smaller. 6. All markers shall be OSHA approved. 7. All Exposed piping systems shall be painted in accordance with ANSI standards. D. Valve tags Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000- 18 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1. All valves on pipes of every description shall have neat circular black and white laminated fibre-engraved white showing through tags of at least 1'/2" in diameter, attached with a brass hook to each valve stem. Stamp on these valves tags in letters, as large as practical, the number of the valve and the service such as indicated on the"Valve List". The numbers on each service shall be consecutive. All valves on tanks and pumps shall be numbered by 3" black and white laminated fibre-engraved white showing through discs with white numbers 2" secured to stem of valves by means of brass hooks or small solid link brass chain. 2. The valve numbers shall correspond with numbers indicated for valves and controls on two printed valve lists prepared by the Plumbing Contractor. These printed lists shall state the numbers and locations of each valve and control and the section, fixture or equipment which it controls, and other necessary information, such as requiring the opening or closing of another valve when one valve is to be opened or closed. 3. The valve lists shall be prepared in a form to meet the approval of the Architect and shall be mounted framed under glass at the direction of the Owner. 3.3 TESTING A. General 1. All labor, materials, instruments, devices and power required for testing shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor. The tests shall be performed in the presence and to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and such other parties as may have legal Jurisdiction. No piping in any location shall be closed up, furred in, or covered before testing. 2. Where portions of piping systems are to be covered or concealed before completion of the project, those portions shall be tested separately in the manner specified herein for the respective entire system. 3. Any piping or equipment that has been left unprotected and subject to mechanical or other injury shall be retested in part or in whole as directed. 4. The Architect/Engineer retains the right to request a recheck or resetting of any pump or instrument by this contractor during the guarantee period at no additional cost to the Contract. 5. Repair or replace any defective work with new work without extra charge to the Contract. Repeat tests as directed, until the work is proven to meet the requirements specified herein. 6. Restore to its finished condition any work, damaged or disturbed, provided by other contractors and engage the original contractor to do the work of restoration to the damaged or disturbed work. 7. The fixtures shall be tested for stability of support and satisfactory operation. The piping shall be tested when directed by the Contractor for stability. 8. After the fixtures are set and connected, and the piping systems to same have been tested, this Plumbing Contractor shall turn water on the fixtures, and equipment, fill the traps, etc., and the proper operation of all items shall be demonstrated by him in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Architect or their designated representatives. 9. Caulking of screwed joints or holes in piping will not be acceptable. 10. This Plumbing Contractor shall notify the any inspectors having jurisdiction, a minimum of 48 hours in advance of making any required tests so that arrangements may be made for their presence to witness his scheduled tests. B. Specific: 1. Potable and Non-Potable Cold-Water Piping Systems: Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000- 19 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA a. Upon completion of the roughing-in and before setting fixtures and final connection to all equipment, all water piping systems shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 125 PSIG. b. Each system's test shall be maintained for eight hours without a drop-in pressure. C. After testing, provide complete adjustment of all parts of each water system until design distribution or balancing is obtained throughout. 3.4 DISINFECTION, CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Disinfection 1. Each water system shall be cleaned and disinfected by this Plumbing Contractor. Cleaning and disinfection shall be performed after all pipes, valves, fixtures and other components of the system are installed, tested and ready for operation. 2. All water piping shall be thoroughly flushed with clean potable water, prior to disinfection, to remove dirt and other contaminants. Screens of faucets shall be removed before flushing and re-installed after completion of disinfection. 3. Disinfection shall be done using sodium hypochlorite in the following manner: a. A service cock shall be provided and located at the water service entrance and at each branch piping system to a phase. The disinfecting agent shall be injected into and through the system from this cock only. b. The disinfecting agent shall be injected by a proportioning pump or device through the service cock slowly and continuously at an even rate. During disinfection, flow of disinfecting agent into main water supply shall not be permitted. C. All sectional valves shall be opened during disinfection. All outlets shall be fully opened at least twice during injection and the residual checked with orthotolidin solution. d. When the chlorine residual concentration, calculated on the volume of water the piping will contain, indicates not less than 50 PPM (parts per million) at all outlets, then all valves shall be closed and secured. e. The residual chlorine shall be retained in the piping systems for a period of not less than 24 hours. f. After the retention, the residual shall be not less than five parts per million. If less, then the process shall be repeated as described above. g. If satisfactory,then all fixtures shall be flushed with clean potable water until residual chlorine by orthotolidin tests shall not be greater than the incoming water supply(this may be zero). 4. All work and certification of performance shall be performed by approved applicators or qualified personnel with chemical and laboratory experience. Certification of performance shall indicate: a. Name and location of the job and date when disinfection was performed. b. Material used for disinfection. C. Retention period of disinfectant in piping system. d. PPM chlorine during retention. e. PPM chlorine after flushing. f. Statement that disinfection was performed as specified. g. Signature and address of company/person performing disinfection. 5. Upon completion of final flushing (after retention period), this Contractor shall obtain a minimum of one water sample from each hot and cold-water line and submit samples to a State-approved laboratory. Samples shall be taken from the faucets located at highest Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000-20 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA floor and furthest from meter or main water supply. The laboratory report shall show the following: a. Name and address of approved laboratory testing the samples. b. Name and location of job and date the samples were obtained. C. The coliform organism count (an acceptable test shall show absence of coliform organisms). 6. If analysis does not satisfy the above minimum requirements, the disinfection procedure shall be repeated. 7. Before acceptance of the systems, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer for his review, three (3) copies of Certification of Performance as specified above. 8. Under no circumstances shall the Plumbing Contractor permit the use of any portion of domestic water system until properly disinfected, flushed and certified. B. Cleaning and Adjusting 1. At the completion of the work, all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned. All equipment, pipe, valves and fittings shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings and sludge which may have accumulated by operation of the system for testing. 2. Any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of the building, its finish, or furnishings, due to the Plumbing Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the Plumbing Contractor at no increase in Contract costs. 3. At the completion of the work, all water systems shall be adjusted for quiet operation. 4. All automatic control devices shall be adjusted for proper operation. 5. All plumbing fixtures and exposed metal work shall be adjusted for proper operation. Floor drain strainers and traps shall be cleaned of all debris. 6. All items of equipment shall be thoroughly inspected and any items dented, scratched or otherwise damaged in any manner shall be replaced or repaired and painted to match the original finish. All items so repaired and refinished shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for inspection and approval. 3.5 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Provide any and all special tools, recommended by the manufacturer of items furnished, noted as not being commonly available. 3.6 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL A. Upon completion of the work, furnish to the Owner, in duplicate, certificates of inspection and/or approval from state and local Inspection authorities having jurisdiction indicating the installed systems compliance to their requirements. 3.7 QUIET OPERATION A. All work provided under this Section of the Specifications shall operate under conditions of load without sound or vibration which is abnormally objectionable for such equipment in the opinion of the Architect. In case of moving machinery, sound or vibration noticeable outside of the room in which it is installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room will be considered objectionable Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000-21 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA shall be corrected in an approved manner by the Plumbing Contractor at no change in Contract amount. 3.8 SYSTEMS A. Indirect Piping (Interior) 1. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for checking each pipe for alignment, center line elevation and invert grade for underground installations. 2. The indirect drainage piping three inches and smaller in diameter shall pitch a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot, and piping four inches and larger in diameter shall pitch a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot. 3. The changes in direction of each drainage system shall be made with "Wye" branches and 1/8 bends. Provide long sweep bends at bottom of stacks with a vertical cleanout just above the floor at places where a "Wye" and 1/8 bends at bottom of stacks and end cleanouts cannot be installed. B. Potable and Non-Potable Cold-Water Piping 1. Vacuum breakers and/or backflow preventers shall be installed on supplies to each piece of equipment, and hose-end valved connection, as required, to prevent back-siphonage and backflow. 2. Branch lines from water service or main lines shall be taken off the top or bottom of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. All water service pipes, fittings, and valves shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and not less than one inch between coverings on the different services. 3. Water piping shall be run parallel and graded evenly to the drainage points. There shall be a minimum '/2" hose-end drain valve with hole-end vacuum breaker provided for each low point in the piping, so that all parts of each water system can be drawn-off. Piping 2" and smaller shall have a 1/4" size drain valve. 4. All piping connections to equipment shall be provided with unions or flanges to permit convenient disassemble for alterations and repairs. 5. No piping shall be installed in a manner to permit back siphonage or backflow of any flow of water from the waste non-potable or process system into the domestic water systems or their distribution piping under any conditions. Approved backflow preventers shall be installed where cross-connections are required. 6. Where flanges are installed in the water systems, install red rubber gaskets between each pair of flanges. 7. Heating and/or bending of copper tubing to eliminate the installation of fittings will not be permitted (exception: flexible risers between fixture stop and kitchen/lavatory faucet). 8. Piping systems shall be kept clean during all phases of work. Open ends of incomplete piping shall be protected to prevent the entrance of foreign materials. 9. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. 3.9 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Piping Installation 1. Install piping approximately as shown on the drawings, based on the existing conditions or as directed during installation by the Architect/Engineer. 2. Piping shall be installed as straight and direct as possible forming right angles or parallel lines with building walls, other piping and neatly spaced. Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000-22 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3. The horizontal runs of piping, except where concealed in partitions, shall be installed as high as possible. 4. Piping or other apparatus shall not be installed in such a manner so as to interfere with the full swing of the doors, windows and access to other equipment. 5. The arrangement, positions and connections of pipes,fixtures, drains, valves, and the like, indicated on the drawings shall be followed as closely as possible, but the right is reserved by the Architect/Engineer to change locations and elevations to accommodate the work, without additional compensation for such change. 6. It shall be possible to drain the water from all sections of cold-water piping system. Pitch piping back to drain valves. 7. Screwed piping of brass or chrome plated brass shall be made up with special care to avoid marring or damaging pipe and fitting exterior and interior surfaces. 8. Small fittings shall be screwed up close to the shoulders of male threads. Lampwick, cord, wool, or any other similar material shall not be used to make up thread joints. 9. Screwed pipe and copper tubing shall be reamed smooth before installation. 10. All exposed piping in connection with fixtures and where exposed on finished walls or to view, shall be chrome plated. Where chrome plated piping is installed, cut and thread pipe so that no unplated pipe threads are visible when the work is completed. 11. Reducing fittings, unless otherwise approved in special cases, shall be provided in making reduction in size of pipe. Bushings will not be allowed unless specifically approved. 12. Remove and replace with new materials, any copper or brass piping (chrome plated or unplated) and valves showing visible tool marks. 13. Vertical risers shall be firmly supported by riser clamps, properly installed to relieve all weight from the fittings. 14. Any piece of pipe six inches or less in length shall be considered a nipple. 15. All water service piping shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work to permit finished covering to be not less than I inch from other work. 16. The pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States of America and in accordance with the Commercial Standards, American National Standards Institute and American Society of Testing Materials. B. Hanger Installation 1. All piping shall be supported from the building structure by means of approved hangers and supports, to maintain proper grading and pitching of lines, to prevent vibration and to secure piping in place, and shall be so arranged as to provide for expansion and contraction. 2. Maximum spacing of hangers on runs of pipe (vertical and horizontal) having no concentration of weight shall be as follows: SCHEDULE MATERIAL Steel Copper PVC Pipe Size (inches) Hanger Spacing in Feet/Pipe .50 6 .75 6 1.00 6 1.25 10 1.50 10 2.00 10 2.50 10 3.00 10 Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000-23 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3.50 10 4.00 10 5.00 6.00 8.00 3. Friction clamps shall be installed at the base of the plumbing risers and at each floor(above or below floor slabs). Friction clamps installed above floor slabs shall not be supported from or rest on floor sleeves. 4. Provide hangers at a maximum distance of two feet from both sides of all changes in direction (horizontal and vertical), on both sides of concentrated loads (equipment) and at valves. 5. Hangers, in general, for all horizontal piping shall be A Band type hangers for piping up to 4' size. These hangers shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of the pipe insulation protectors (sheet metal shields) specified herein. Gang type hangers may be used for supply piping up to 3" size where applicable and in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. 6. All vertical drops and runouts including insulated pipes shall be supported by split ring hangers with extension rods and wall plates or stamped type up to 2" size only. 7. Provide on all horizontal insulated lines, pipe covering protectors (shields)at each hanger. Each protector shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of the Pipe insulation. 8. Lock nuts or retaining straps shall be provided with all beam clamps. 9. All supplementary steel including factory fabricated channels and associated accessories, including 12-inch-long sheet metal shields, throughout both suspended and floor mounted shall be provided by this Contractor and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer. 10. Hangers shall not pierce the insulation on any insulated pipe except when prior approval is given. 11. Wire, tape or wood fastenings for shims or support of any pipe or tubing shall not be used. 12. Remove all rust from the ferrous hanger equipment (hangers, rods, and bolts) and apply one coat of galvanized paint immediately after erection. 13. Piping at all equipment and each control valve shall be supported to prevent strains or distortions in the connected equipment and control valves. Piping and equipment shall be supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without requiring additional support after these items are removed. 14. All piping shall be independently supported from the building structure and not from the piping, ductwork, conduit or ceiling suspension systems of other systems. 15. Installation of hangers which permit wide lateral motion of any pipe will not be acceptable. 16. All hangers in contact with un-insulated piping shall be compatible with piping material. C. Installation of Sleeves, Inserts and Escutcheons 1. Sleeves in floors shall set one (1) inch above the finished floor surface or as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 2. Sleeves through interior masonry or non-masonry walls or partitions shall be set flush with the finished surfaces of the wall or partition. 3. Field drilling for inserts required for work under this section of the specifications shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor. 4. Each interior wall or floor sleeve shall be firestopped to provide equivalent fire resistance to floor or wall penetration. Each sleeve penetration thru the slab on grade shall be made gas tight. 5. Escutcheons shall be installed around all exposed insulated or bare pipe, passing through a finished floor, wall or ceiling. Escutcheons shall fit snugly around the bare or insulated Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000-24 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA pipe. Escutcheons shall be chrome plated cast brass at fixture supplies and traps where exposed. Spun bell type escutcheons in these locations are unacceptable. D. Valve Installation: There shall be valves where indicated on the drawings and where specified as follows: 1. At building service entrances, all supply risers, branches to groups of fixtures, branches to separate fixtures, equipment, connections to other systems and sectionalizing points in each system. 2. Each piece of equipment shall have isolation valves for each service connected or at inlet and outlet of equipment with single service. 3. At the low points of each water system including trapped sections, provide a tee with 1/2- inch branch and ball valve with 3/4-inch hose end vacuum breaker and attached chain with cap. 4. Valves shall be located to permit easy operation, replacement or repairs. 5. Provide access panels where valves would otherwise be inaccessible. 3.10 PIPE COVERING INSTALLATION A. Before pipe covering is applied, all pressure tests shall have been performed and approved. B. Pipe covering shall be applied over clean, dry surfaces. C. Pipe covering shall be continuous and shall be carefully fitted with side and end joints butted firmly and tightly together finished as specified herein. D. Pipe covering and auxiliaries shall be kept dry during storage and application. E. Adhesives, and coatings shall not be applied when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. F. Valve bodies shall have covering applied up to the stem. G. It is the intent of this Specification that all vapor barriers be sealed and be continuous throughout. Staples shall not be used on vapor barrier jackets. H. Where pipe covering ends occur at equipment or fixtures, end caps on the covering shall be provided. I. Adequate operating clearances shall be provided at control mechanisms. J. Pipe covering for flanges shall overlap the adjoining pipe by a minimum of three inches on each side. K. Pipe covering shall be provided on all piping passing through ceilings and through the interior above ground sleeves (wall and floor). L. All voids and or seams in insulation shall be filled with insulating cement and finished as specified herein. M. In the event staples are used, they shall be coated with a vapor barrier mastic after insulation and taped. These staples shall not be visible on finished installation. Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000-25 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA N. Staples are not permitted on domestic hot water applications. O. End joints of each section of the installed pipe covering shall be tightly butted. 3.11 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall be installed complete with all required hangers and supports in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. All equipment provided under this Section shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. C. Furnish and install all steel structural support members for proper hanging and support of equipment. END OF SECTION 220000 Gienapp Architects PLUMBING 220000-26 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 23 00 00 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PROVISIONS INCLUDED A. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 01, General Requirements, apply to the work under this Section. B. Attention of the General Contractor and this Subcontractor is drawn to provisions of the Contract Documents regarding the responsibility of all bidders to visit and inspect the site, including the existing building, and to base all bids on conclusions drawn from such inspections. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Examine all Project Specifications and Drawings for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. B. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under Contract. C. When open-flame or spark producing tools such as blower torches, welding equipment, etc., are required in the process of executing the work, the General Contractor shall be notified not less than 24 hours in advance of the time that the work is to begin and the location where the work is to be performed. Provide, where necessary, fire protective covering and maintain a constant non- working fire watch where work is being performed and until completed. D. The following definitions apply to the Drawings and Specifications 1. Furnish: The term "furnish" is used to mean "supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations." 2. Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including actual "unloading, unpacking, rigging in place, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations." 3. Provide: The term "provide" means to "furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use." 4. Installer: An "installer" is the sub-contractor or an entity engaged by the sub-contractor, either as an employee, or sub-subcontractor for a performance of a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 5. Sub-Contractor: The term "Sub-Contractor" shall mean HVAC Sub-Contractor. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all materials, labor, equipment and supplies and the performance of all operations to provide complete working systems, in gene 1. Unit Ventilators Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 1 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2. Piping 3. Piping Cover 4. Exhaust Systems 5. Testing and Balancing of Air and Water Systems 6. Provide a complete system of automatic temperature controls, as shown on the Drawings and called for in this Specification. 7. Systems shall be complete, including all appurtenances for fully workable systems. 8. Cutting and Patching 9. Firestopping 10. Demolition as indicated on designed plans. 11. Air Outlets 12. Vibration Isolation B. Provide any other component or related system (whether or not listed)which is part of the overall design and basic equipment and deemed necessary for its completion, thoroughness and readiness for operation in perfect condition. C. Furnish, set up and maintain all derricks, hoisting machinery, scaffolds, staging and planking as required for the work. D. Supply the service of an experienced and competent supervisor who shall be in charge of the HVAC Sub-Contractor's work at the site. E. The HVAC Sub-Contractor shall be held responsible for subletting any work shown or specified herein, but not classified as HVAC work in order to avoid any jurisdictional disputes and work stoppage arising therefrom. F. All electrical apparatus and controls furnished as a part of the HVAC work shall conform to applicable requirements under SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL. G. All work shall be coordinated with the Construction Schedule. 1.4 FILED SUB-BIDS A. HVAC is stipulated as a Filed Sub-Bid under Part D, Item 2 of the Form for General Bid. B. All sub-bids shall be submitted on the Form for Sub-Bid furnished by the Awarding Authority, as required by section 44A-F of Chapter 149 of the Massachusetts General Laws, as amended. C. Sub-bids must be filed with the Awarding Authority in a sealed envelope, before twelve o'clock (noon), local time, on the date stipulated in the Advertisement. D. Specific information relating to the sub-bidders is set forth in the Contract Documents, under the heading "Notice To All Bidders, Including Sub-Bidders" and the attention of sub-bidders is directed thereto. The Work of this Filed Sub-Bid is shown on all plumbing drawings: HO-1, HO-2, HO-3. HO- 4. 1­11-0, 1­11-1. E. SUB-SUBS 1. Sub-sub bids are required for the following subcategories of this section: Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 2 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA Classes of Work Reference Specification Paragraphs Sheet Metal 23 00 00 2.1 Insulation 23 00 00 2.3 Air Balancing 23 00 00 3.6 2. Sub-bidders shall include the appropriate information for listed sub-categories in Paragraph E of the Form for Sub-bid. 3. If the sub-sub portion of the Work is to be done by the Sub-bidder's personnel the sub-bidder should list its name and trade, and leave the dollar amount blank. 1.5 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Power wiring is specified in Section 16100 - Electrical, and will be provided by the Electrical Sub- Contractor. 1.6 PRODUCTS FURNISHED, BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Furnish access panels and doors for installation by the General Contractor. 1.7 PRODUCTS INSTALLED, BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Install duct-mounted smoke detectors which will be furnished by the Electrical Sub-Contractor. The HVAC Sub-Contractor shall wire the appropriate fan to shut down upon detection of smoke. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall power wire and wire the smoke detector to the fire alarm panel. 1.8 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS A. Bidders are expected to examine and to be thoroughly familiar with all contract documents and with the conditions under which work will be carried out. The Awarding Authority (Owner) will not be responsible for errors, omissions and/or charges for extra work arising from General Contractor's or Filed Subcontractor's failure to familiarize themselves with the Contract Documents or existing conditions. By submitting a bid, the Bidder agrees and warrants that he has had the opportunity to examine the site and the Contract Documents, that he is familiar with the conditions and requirements of both and where they require, in any part of the work a given result to be produced, that the Contract Documents are adequate and that he will produce the required results. 1.9 CODES, ORDINANCES, AND PERMITS A. Installation of systems and equipment provided under this section shall be done in strict accordance with Massachusetts Department of Public Safety Codes, Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection, Massachusetts State Building and Mechanical Code, and City or Town Regulations having jurisdiction. B. All pressure vessels shall conform to ASME and state codes and regulations. C. All work, where applicable, shall conform to NFPA codes and all material shall be U.L. approved. Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 3 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA D. All electrical apparatus furnished under this section shall be approved by the U.L. and shall be so labeled or listed where such is applicable. Where custom-built equipment is specified and the U.L. label or listing is not applicable to the completed product, all components used in the construction of such equipment shall be labeled or listed by U.L. where such is applicable to the component. E. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Deliver certificates of inspection to Engineer. No work shall be covered before examination and approval by Engineer, inspectors, and authorities having jurisdiction. Replace imperfect or condemned work conforming to requirements, satisfactory to Engineer, and without extra cost to the Owner. If work is covered before due inspection and approval, the installing sub-contractors shall pay costs of uncovering and reinstalling the covering, whether it meets contract requirements or not. 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, of the Specifications for record drawings, closeout procedures and closeout submittals to be provided under this section. 1.11 CLEANING A. During the progress of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning work, clean up and remove all oil, grease and other debris caused by this work. At completion, the sub-contractor shall clean all equipment, piping and duct systems and leave all work in perfect operating condition. 1.12 RESPONSIBILITY A. The structure and its appurtenances, clearances and the related services, such as plumbing, heating, ventilation and electric service have been planned to be legal, adequate and suitable for the installation of equipment specified under this section. The Owner will not assume any increase in cost caused by differing requirements peculiar to a particular make or type of equipment, and any incidental cost shall be borne by the HVAC Sub-Contractor. He shall be responsible for the proper location of his required sleeves, chases, inserts, etc., and see that they are set in the forms before the concrete is poured. He shall be responsible for his work and equipment furnished and installed by him until the completion and final acceptance of this contract, and he shall replace any work which may be damaged, lost or stolen, without additional cost to the Owner. 1.13 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS, WORK, AND GROUNDS A. Materials, fixtures and equipment shall be properly protected and all pipe and duct openings shall be temporarily closed so as to prevent obstruction and damage. B. Protect and preserve all materials, supplies and equipment of every description and all work performed. Protect all existing equipment and property of any kind from damage during the operations. Damage shall be repaired or replaced promptly by the sub-contractor at his expense. 1.14 DRAWINGS Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 -4 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA A. It is the intention of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the Drawings, but mentioned in the Specifications or vice-versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided by the sub-contractor without additional expense to the Owner. B. The Drawings are generally diagrammatic. The locations of all items that are not definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only. The exact locations must be determined at the project and shall have the approval of the Engineer before being installed. The sub-contractor shall follow Drawings, including his shop drawings, in laying out work and shall check the Drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions. Where space conditions appear inadequate, notify the Engineer before proceeding with the installation. The sub-contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. C. Size of ducts and pipes and methods of running them are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. To carry out the true intent and purpose of the Drawings, all necessary parts to make complete approved working systems ready for use, shall be furnished without extra charge. All work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid being unsightly. D. All measurements shall be taken at the building by the sub-contractor, prior to purchasing and installing the equipment and piping. 1.15 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Provide five (5) sets of shop drawings for the following: 1. Unit Ventilators 2. Piping Cover 3. Piping 4. Air Outlets 5. Automatic Temperature Controls components complete with wiring diagrams 6. Sequence of Controls 7. Sheetmetal Standards 8. Sheetmetal Shop Drawings B. Sub-contractor shall provide a complete set of approved submittals to the owners. Project Representative for Utility Rebate requirements within 30 Days of receiving approval of final submittal. 1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit operation and maintenance data complete with at least the following: 1. Table of Contents 2. Introduction: a. Explanation of manual and its use b. Description of all systems 3. Plant Operation: Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 5 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA a. Operating instructions for all HVAC apparatus. 4. Maintenance: a. Maintenance and lubricating chart: Furnish three sets of charts indicating equipment tag number, location of equipment, equipment service, greasing and lubricating requirements, lubricants and intervals of lubrication. 5. Recommended list of spare parts: Furnish two typed sets of instructions for ordering spare parts with sectional views of the fittings or equipment showing parts numbered or labeled to facilitate ordering replacements, including a list with itemized prices of those parts recommended to be kept on hand as spares, as well as the name and address of where they may be obtained. 6. Valve Chart 7. Manufacturer's Literature: a. Unit Ventilators b. Air Outlets c. Automatic Temperature Controls d. Sequence of Control e. Exhaust Systems 1.17 UNDERWRITERS' LABEL AND LISTING A. All electrical apparatus furnished under this Section shall be approved by the UL and shall be labeled or listed where such is applicable. Where custom-built equipment is specified and the UL label or listing is not applicable to the completed product, all components used in the construction of such equipment shall be labeled or listed by UL where such is applicable to the component. 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. All cutting and patching one (1) square foot and less in area necessary for the proper installation of work to be performed under this Section and subsections shall be performed by the HVAC Sub-Contractor. All cutting and patching associated with demolition work and greater than one (1) square foot in area for the installation of work under this section shall be by the General Contractor. B. All work shall be fully coordinated with all phases of construction, in order to minimize the requirements for cutting and patching. C. The sub-contractor shall see that all such chases, openings, and sleeves are located accurately and are of the proper size and shape and shall consult with the Engineer in reference to this work. In so doing, he shall confine the cutting to the smallest extent possible consistent with the work to be done. In no case shall piers or structural members be cut without the approval of the Engineer. D. Carefully fit around, close up, repair, patch, and point around the work specified herein to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. E. Fill and patch all openings or holes left in the existing structures by the removal of existing equipment by himself, his sub-sub-contractors or other filed sub-contractors. Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 6 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA F. All of this work shall be carefully done by workmen competent to do such work and with the proper and smallest tools applicable. G. Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be the sub-contractor's responsibility therefore. H. The fire resistance rating of floors, walls, and ceilings shall be maintained. UL listed firestopping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.19 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee that all work installed will be free from any and all defects in workmanship and/or materials and that all apparatus will develop capacities and characteristics specified. B. If, during a period of one year from the date of final completion and acceptance of the work, any such defects in workmanship, material or performance appear, the HVAC Sub-Contractor will, without cost to the Owner, remedy such defects within a reasonable time to be specified in notice from the Architect. C. Provide all refrigeration compressors with the manufacturer's extended replacement warranty for a total of five years. All warranties must have been submitted prior to Final Payment. D. Correct all damage to insulation, paint or building caused by defects in his work, equipment, and its operation. Guarantee shall include startup, shutdown, maintenance, and 24-hour service during the guarantee period. E. Any apparatus that requires excessive service during the warranty period will be considered defective and shall be replaced. 1.20 ELECTRICAL A. All electrical apparatus and controls furnished as a part of this Section shall conform to applicable requirements under SECTION 260000 - ELECTRICAL. B. All motors furnished under this Section shall be furnished by the manufacturer of the equipment served and shall be mounted and aligned so as to run free and true. Each motor shall be built to conform to the latest applicable NEMA, ANSI and IEEE standards for the type and duty of service it is to perform. C. Each motor shall be designed to operate on 60 Hz, and each shall be expressly wound for the voltage specified. Each motor shall operate satisfactorily at rated load and frequency with a voltage variation no greater than plus or minus 10 percent of voltage specified. Dual voltage 208/220 motors will not be accepted. D. All motors shall be provided with adequate starting and protective equipment and each shall have a terminal box of adequate size to accommodate the required conduit and wires. E. Motor controllers shall be equipped with all poles, auxiliary contacts and other devices necessary to permit the interlocking and control sequences required. Controller operating coils shall be generally designed for 120-volt operation, and 3 phase motors shall be provided with thermal overload protection in all phases. Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 7 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA F. Furnish all magnetic starters for each and every motor furnished under this section of the specification, except where otherwise indicated. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall install and wire the starter. The sub-contractor shall provide disconnects for all HVAC equipment. The Electric Sub-Contractor shall install and wire all disconnects. All starters for motors over 10 HP shall be solid state with reduced inrush design. The maximum allowable inrush shall be 2.5 times running load amperage. All starters for fractional HP motors shall be provided with manufacturer's standard motor starter. G. Furnish and install all low voltage and/or line voltage control wiring for the boiler/burner units, rooftop units, heat recovery unit, pumps, fans, and all equipment provided in this section. All wiring shall be performed by a licensed electrician. 1.21 PAINTING A. All finish field painting shall be provided by the Painting Sub-Contractor. 1.22 STANDARDS A. The latest published issue of the standards, recommendations, or requirements of the following listed societies, associations, or institutes in effect at the date of Contract are part of this Specification. These shall be considered as minimum requirements; specific requirements of this specification and/or associated drawings shall have precedence. In case of conflict between published requirements, the Owner's representative shall determine which is to be followed. 1. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association 2. ANSI American National Standards Institute 3. ASHRAE American Society for Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning 4. Engineers 5. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 6. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 7. FIA Factory Insurance Association 8. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 9. MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America 10. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 11. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 12. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 13. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 14. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act 15. NEC National Electric Code 1.23 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The work shall be so performed that the progress of the entire building construction including all other trades, shall not be delayed nor interfered with. Materials and apparatus shall be installed as fast as conditions of the building will permit and must be installed promptly when and as desired. B. Confer with all other trades relative to location of all apparatus and equipment to be installed and select locations so as not to conflict with work of other Sections. Any conflicts shall be referred immediately to the Architect for decision to prevent delay in installation of work. All work and Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 8 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA materials placed in violation of this clause shall be readjusted to the Architect's satisfaction, at no expense to the Owner. C. Where work of this section will be installed in close proximity to work of other sections or where there is evidence that the work of this section will interfere with work of other sections, assist in working out space conditions to make satisfactory adjustment. Prepare and submit for approval 3/8" scale or larger working drawings and sections, clearly showing how this work is to be installed in relation to the work of other sections. If the work of this section is installed before coordinating with other trades or so as to cause interference with work of other trades, make changes necessary to protect conditions without extra charge. D. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus and give information in advance to build openings into the work. Furnish and set in place all sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals. E. All distribution systems which require pitch or slope such as storm and sanitary drains and water piping shall have the right of way over those which do not. Confer with other trades as to the location of pipes, lights and apparatus and install work to avoid interferences. F. This sub-contractor shall, with the approval of the Architect and without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in his work as required by normal structural interferences, or by interference with work of other trades, or for proper execution of the work. G. This sub-contractor shall protect all materials and work of other trades from damage that may be caused by his work and shall make good any damages so caused. 1.24 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance of Ownership of the HVAC system installed within this scope of work shall be contingent on passing a satisfactory system pressure test, mechanical performance test and cooling and heating function test to determine that the system will perform according to the contract requirements. The above tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer and the Owner at his option and acceptance will only be granted in writing by the Owner after receipt of certification from the Engineer that the design criteria have been met. B. The work shall be so performed that the progress of the entire building construction, including all other trades, shall not be delayed or interfered with. Materials and apparatus shall be installed as fast as conditions permit and must be installed promptly when and as desired. C. Confer with all other trades relative to location of all apparatus and equipment to be installed and select locations so as not to conflict with work of other Sections. Any conflicts shall be referred immediately to the Engineer for decision to prevent delay in installation of work. All work and materials placed in violation of this clause shall be readjusted to the Engineer's satisfaction, at no expense to the Owner. D. Where work of this section will be installed in close proximity to work of other sections or where there is evidence that the work of this section will interfere with work of other sections, assist in working out space conditions to make satisfactory adjustment. If so directed, prepare and submit for approval 3/8" scale or larger working drawings and sections, clearly showing how this work is to be installed in relation to the work of other sections. If the work of this section is installed before coordinating with other trades or so as to cause interference with work of other trades, make changes necessary to protect conditions without extra charge. Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 9 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1.25 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate work of this Filed Subcontract with that of other trades, affecting or affected by this work, and cooperate with the other trades as is necessary to assure the steady progress of work. B. Do not order or deliver any materials until all submittals, required in the listed Specification Sections included as part of this Filed Subcontract, have been received and approved by the Architect. C. Before proceeding with installation work, inspect all project conditions and all work of other trades to assure that all such conditions and work are suitable to satisfactorily receive the work of this Section and notify the Architect in writing of any which are not. Do not proceed further until corrective work has been completed or waived. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL WORK A. Furnish all sheet metal work and accessories specified herein. B. References to "Duct Manual" herein refer to the latest edition of the HVAC Duct Construction Standards as published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor National Association, Inc (hereinafter referred to as SMACNA). C. All ducts shall be of galvanized steel construction as specified. Ducts shall be properly stiffened to prevent drumming when the fans are in operation. D. All galvanized duct thicknesses shall be in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA for the service indicated. E. Seal all low-pressure duct joints (Class B) and medium pressure ducts (Class A) with sealant as manufactured by Minnesota Mining Company, Foster, General Electric, or approved equal. Excess sealant must be removed immediately to provide a neat appearance. F. All low-pressure ducts shall be fabricated for 2 inches water gauge pressure. Low pressure ducts shall include all ductwork. 1. All ducts shall be constructed in accordance with Table 1 and Figure 1-5 through 1-13 of the Duct Manual. 2. Duct joints shall be constructed in accordance with Fig. 1-4 of the Duct Manual. 3. Duct seams shall be constructed in accordance with Fig. 1-5 of the Duct Manual. 4. Duct reinforcement shall be per Table 1-18, Figures 1-9, 1-10 and 1-11 of the Duct Manual. 5. Fittings and special installations shall be constructed in accordance with Figure 2-1 through 2-10 of the Duct Manual. 6. Register and grille connections shall be in accordance with Figure 2-16 of the Duct Manual. 7. Flexible connections shall be 4"wide connections, in accordance with Fig. 2-19 of the Duct Manual, constructed of Vent glass heavy glass fabric double coated with neoprene and shall be as manufactured by Vent Fabrics, Inc. Flexible connections shall meet the requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters. Exterior flexible connection shall be weathertight. 8. Hangers and supporting systems shall be in accordance with Figure 4-1 through 4-8 and Tables 4-1 through 4-3 of the Duct Manual. Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 10 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2.2 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES A. Access Doors 1. In ductwork up to 2-inch pressure class. 2. Frame: 24-gauge galvanized steel with seal. 3. Door: hinged, with 24-gauge galvanized steel exterior and interior panels. 4. Locks: doors 16" and under, one lock doors over 16", two locks. 5. Seals: foam gasket. 2.3 INSULATION A. Furnish all insulation required for the HVAC system, including: 1. Pipe insulation for chill water and heating water supply and return piping including fittings, including fittings, valves, strainers, etc.; 2. Exhaust air ductwork. B. Insulation shall be Owens-Corning, Knauf, Certainteed, or approved equal. C. Piping: See insulation schedule on drawings for type and wall thickness. 1. PVC jackets shall meet ASTM D1784, Class 14253-C have a flame spread of 25 or less, have a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. PVC jackets shall be joined and sealed by applying continuous PVC cement along all seams. NOTE: All new piping within the mechanical room shall be provided with color coded PVC jackets, color as selected by Engineer/Architect. 2. Exterior pipe insulation shall be weatherproofed with Childers, Monville, Ferro Corp., or approved equal, aluminum jacketing. The jacketing shall be manufactured from T/3003 aluminum and shall have a factory attached moisture barrier continuously laminated across the full width of the jacketing. Jacket thickness shall be 0.016 inch. D. Ductwork insulation: See insulation schedule on drawings for type and wall thickness. E. Fiberglass Insulation: Fiberglass shall meet ASTMC 335 for thermal efficiency with UV protection. F. Jackets: PVC jackets shall meet ASTM D1784, Class 14253-C have a flame spread of 25 or less, have a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. PVC jackets shall be joined and sealed by applying continuous PVC cement along all seams. G. Ends of insulation shall be sealed with material as recommended by the manufacturer. H. A complete moisture and vapor seal shall be provided wherever insulation terminates against metal hangers, anchors and other projections through insulation on cold surfaces. I. Fire Hazard Rating: Insulation materials, coatings and other accessories shall individually have a fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for fuel contributed and smoke developed. Ratings shall be determined by U.L. "Test Method for Fire Hazard Classification of Building Materials", No. 823 or NFPA No. 225 or ASTM E84. J. Identification: Furnish and apply piping identification to all piping, showing direction of flow approximately 30'-0" O.C. on bottom, side or top of all pipes. Furnish and apply name or Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 11 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA classification of service adjacent to each arrow. Piping identification shall be plastic cloth pipe markers. 2.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Furnish all pipe and fittings required for the HVAC systems, including hot water supply (HWS), hot water return (HWR) piping. B. All hot water supply (HWS), hot water return (HWR), chilled water supply (piping 2'/2 inch and larger shall be Schedule 40 seamless black steel pipe and shall conform to ANSI B-36.10 and ASTM A-53, grade A or B. All piping 2 inch and below shall be Type K hard drawn copper, ASTM B88 with 95/5 solder fittings, Schedule 40 seamless steel welding fittings. C. Unions for use with steel piping shall be 300-pound malleable iron, ground joint, or 2,000-pound forged steel, 600 psi WOG, sweat or thread end as required. Unions for copper pipe shall be bronze, ground joint, 600 psi WOG, sweat or thread end as required. D. Drain (D) and Cold-water make-up piping shall be Type K hard drawn copper, ASTM B88 with wrought copper ANSI 1316.22 fittings. Joints shall be soldered, ASTM B32, with 95/5 solder. E. Provide dielectric unions at all connections of dissimilar metals. Dielectric unions shall be factory certified to withstand a minimum of 600 volts on a dry line with no flashover, rated 250 psig and conforming to ANSI B16.39. Dielectric union and flange pipe threads shall conform to ANSI B2.1. 2.5 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, INSERTS A. Carpenter and Patterson, Grinnell, Calco, or approved equal. Figure numbers listed are Carpenter and Patterson numbers. B. General: Piping systems shall be supported in accordance with ANSI B31.1 so as to maintain required pitch of lines, prevent vibration, and provide for expansion and contraction movement. C. Piping hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed for piping. Provide all components (i.e., inserts, rods, clamps, hangers, washer, lock nuts, rollers, etc.) necessary for a complete installation. D. Hangers: 1. Hangers for all hot water supply and return piping shall be Figure 100SH refrigeration hanger and shield. 2. Hangers for all other piping shall be Figure 1A Bands. 3. All hangers shall be with supporting rods and nuts. Rod sizes shall be 3/8" for pipe 2" and smaller; and 1/2"for 2 '/2" and 3" pipe. 4. Pipe covering protection saddles shall be Series 350 galvanized steel and shall be furnished for installation at each hanger where pipes are insulated. E. Upper Attachments to Building Structure: 1. Reinforced Concrete Construction: Upper attachment welded or clamped to steel clip angles which are expansion-bolted to the concrete. Expansion bolting shall be located so that piping loads place bolts in shear. Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 12 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2. Structural Framing: Upper attachments welded or clamped to structural steel members. Additional steel members may be necessary in some support locations where piping locations differ from that known on contract drawings. F. Submit details for approval. G. Expansion Fasteners and Power Set Fasteners: In concrete ceiling construction, expansion fasteners may be used for hanger loads up to one-third the manufacturer's rated strength of the expansion fastener. Power set fasteners may be used for loads up to one-fourth of rated load. When greater hanger loads are encountered, additional fasteners may be used and interconnected with steel members combining to support the hanger. 2.6 SLEEVES A. Furnish pipe sleeves for all pipes which pass through masonry floors and walls. Sleeves shall be Schedule 10 steel pipe. Sleeves shall be of the first possible size larger than the outside of the insulation jacket on covered piping and the first possible size larger than the outside of the piping on uncovered pipes. B. Sleeves shall be of sufficient length so as to be flush on either side of masonry walls, flush on underside of masonry floor and extend 2 inch above the finished floor. 2.7 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES A. Thermometers and pressure gauges shall be Trerice, Ashcroft, Taylor or approved equal complete with all required wells. Model numbers used are Trerice numbers. B. Thermometers shall be Model BX9, industrial thermometers, adjustable angle, 9" case. Thermometer ranges shall be 0 °F to 100 °F for use in chilled water piping. C. Pressure gauges shall be Model 500 X with 4'/2 inch case. Ranges shall be 0 to 100 psi. Furnish a Model 865-gauge cock with each gauge. 2.8 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide one piece or hinged type wall and ceiling expansion-type plates with round head setscrews or integral pipe clips. Provide recessed type for floors. For copper lines and in finished rooms provide minimum 18-gage spun brass, chrome plated over nickel plates. For all other areas, provide 18-gage enameled cast-iron or steel plates. 2.9 STRAINERS A. Provide a "Y"type full size strainer as indicated on the Drawings. B. An approved dirt blowout connection shall be made to each strainer, with 1-inch Jenkins Figure 372 and Figure 658 cap and chain; the valve located six inches to twelve inches below the strainer. In the case of strainers under full water pressure, the blowout connection shall terminate at a point where there will be no risk of flooding or damage. C. Strainers 2-inch diameter and smaller shall have screwed ends. Strainers 2-1/2-inch diameter and larger shall have flanged ends. Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 13 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA D. Strainers 2 inch and smaller shall be full size, bronze, "Y" pattern: Tate Temco Figure IY, Spirax Sarco, Mueller or approved equal. E. Strainers 2-1/2 inch or larger shall be cast steel body, "Y" type; Tate Temco figure IY, Spirex Sarco, Mueller or approved equal, 150 psi rating. F. Total open area of basket perforations shall be at least three times the inside area of pipes. G. Strainer baskets shall be stainless steel with 1/16-inch perforations (up to 2-inch size) and 1/8- inch perforations (2-1/2 inch and larger). 2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. General 1. All vibration isolators shall be the product of a single approved manufacturer. 2. Model numbers hereinafter specified are from Mason Industries. Other equivalent units by Consolidated Kinetics, Vibration Mountings and Controls or approved equal are acceptable. B. All vibration isolators for mechanical equipment hung in ceiling shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution of the equipment to be served so as to produce a uniform deflection. Deflections shall be as hereinbefore specified. C. Submittals shall include all spring deflections, spring diameters, scale drawings, attachment details, and rated capacity indicating adequacy for each piece of equipment served. 2.11 FIRE STOPPING A. Manufacturers: 1. 3M, Hilti, STI B. Description: 1. Non-slump, ready-to-use, single-component, neutral-cure, elastomeric silicone sealant that cures upon exposure to atmospheric humidity to form a flexible firestop. Also acts as a barrier to airborne sound transmission. Used to seal construction joints, openings and through penetrations in fire-rated construction. Provides up to 3-hour fire protection. Light gray color, ± 31% movement capability. 2.12 VALVES A. Check valves and drawoff valves shall be Powell, Lunkenheimer, Crane, or approved equal. Figure numbers herein are Powell numbers. B. Check valves 2" and smaller shall be Figure 578, 125# bronze, horizontal swing type with regrinding bronze seat and disc, screwed end. C. Draw-off valves shall be Figure 503H, bronze, screwed inlet, hose outlet. D. Balancing valves shall be Taco Model CS, Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, or approved equal, circuit setter. Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 14 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA E. Ball valve construction, Teflon seats, calibrated nameplate, Schroder valve connections, cast bronze. F. Valves 2" and smaller shall be ball valves. Ball valves shall be Jenkins Figure 32-A, Crane, Stockham or approved equal, bronze ball valves with bronze ball, Teflon seats, brass stem and cadmium plated steel handle with plastic grips. G. Pressure-reducing Valves 1. Bell and Gossett, Armstrong, Taco or equal. H. Diaphragm operated pressure-reducing valve with low inlet pressure check valve and inlet strainer. The strainer shall be easily removable without system shutdown. The valve seat, strainer and stem shall be removable and of non-corrosive material. The body shall be brass. The valve shall be full line sized as shown on the Drawings. Pressure setting to be minimum system operating pressure. I. Combustion Balancing/Shutoff Valves: Furnish and install circuit balancing valves as shown on plans and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. J. Each valve shall have two 1/4" NPT brass metering ports with Nordel check valves and gasketed caps located on both sides of valve seat. Two additional 1/4" NPT connections with brass plugs are to be provided on the opposite side of the metering ports for use as drain connections. Drain connections and metering ports are to be interchangeable to allow for measurement flexibility when valves are installed in tight locations. K. Valves are to be of the "Y" pattern, modified, equal percentage globe style and provide three functions: precise flow measurement; precision flow balancing; positive drip tight shut off. L. Valve shall provide multi-turn, 360-degree adjustment with a micrometer type indicator located on valve handwheel. Valve handwheel shall have hidden memory feature which will provide a means for locking the valve position after the system is balanced. M. Valve body for valves 1/2" to 2" size shall be bronze with ultra-high strength engineered resin plug. The plug shall have precision-contoured channels to distribute flow uniformly across valve seat. Bronze stem and high strength resin handwheel and sleeve. Valves shall have a minimum of four full 360-degree handwheel turns. Connections to be thread or sweat. N. Valve body for 2-1/2" and larger size valves shall be ductile iron with flanged ends. Valve stem and plug disc shall be bronze. Handwheel shall be ergonomically designed providing ease of adjustment. Valve body to be convertible in the field from straight to 90-degree change of flow. Field conversion shall not affect valve accuracy. O. Valve shall be installed with flow in the direction of the arrow on the valve body and installed at least five pipe diameters downstream from any fitting, and at least ten pipe diameters downstream from any pump. Two pipe diameters downstream from the valve should be free of any fittings. When installed, easy and unobstructed access to the valve handwheel and metering ports for adjustment and measurement are to be provided. Mounting of valve in piping must prevent sediment build-up in metering ports. P. Provide all balancing valves with molded removable pre-formed insulation with PVC jacket. Q. Valve size to match pipe size. Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 15 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2.13 AIR OUTLETS A. Tuttle & Bailey, Metal-Aire, Price, Titus, or approved equal. Model numbers are Titus numbers. B. Air Devices: 1. Exhaust (ER) and Return (RR): Titus 350RL of similar material and construction as supply- air registers. with 1 '/4 - inch overlap margin, countersunk screw holes and mounting screws. Exhaust and Return Registers shall be provided with horizontal face bars fixed at 0 deg. Angle, with bar spacing of 3/4" on center. Provide with integral opposed blade damper designed for screwdriver operation. Provide radiations where penetrating floor/ceiling assemblies. Sizes and capacities to be as scheduled on the contract drawings. 2. Transfer Grilles (TG): Titus 350RL of similar material and construction as return air registers. with 1 '/4 - inch overlap margin, countersunk screw holes and mounting screws. Transfer grilles shall be provided with horizontal face bars fixed at 0 deg. Angle, with bar spacing of 3/4" on center. Provide radiations where penetrating floor/ceiling assemblies. Sizes and capacities to be as scheduled on the contract drawings. 3. At all branch takeoffs and where indicated provide vane deflectors (extractors) behind registers and omit volume damper. 4. Provide diffuser frame type (lay-in, surface mount, snap-in or spline)to match ceiling type. 2.14 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. Existing Johnson Controls system shall remain. Sub-contractor shall remove valves, sensors, controllers, wiring, etc. and re-install as required for new Unit Ventilator operation. B. Scope: 1. The control system provided to consist of all transducers, relays, thermostats, dampers, damper operators, valves, valve operators and all other necessary control components, along with a complete system, interlocking and communication wiring/cabling to fill the intent of the specification and provide for a complete and operable system. Provide damper operators for equipment such as mixing dampers, where such operators are not supplied by the equipment manufacturers. 2. All interlocking wiring and installation of all required control devices associated with the unit ventilator installation to be provided by the ATC Contractor. Close coordination to be exercised between the ATC Contractor and the HVAC Sub-Contractor and equipment manufacturers so that installation will be provided in a manner to result in fully operable systems, as intended in these specifications. 3. The ATC contractor shall provide all power wiring, conduit, etc. for all his components requiring such. Provide power wiring from breakers in electric panels to ATC panels. All wiring to be done in strict conformance with Division 26. 4. The Automatic Temperature Control contractor shall be available during the balancing and adjusting period to set damper positions in accordance with the Balancing contractor's settings as indicated on the schedule sheets. 5. Provide wire mold as required for new network and control wiring. C. Incidental Work by Others: 1. The following incidental work to be furnished by the designated sub-contractor under the supervision of the ATC contractor: Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 16 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA a. The HVAC Sub-Contractor shall coordinate transfer of SDCs/ASCs and miscellaneous control devices provided by the ATC contractor to the manufacturers of the following equipment: 1) Unit Ventilators b. The Electrical Sub-Contractor to: 1) Provide all power wiring (110 VAC or greater) to motors. Provide "spare" breakers in electric panels to be used as a power source by ATC contractor for ATC panels. 2) Provide power sources for use of the ATC contractor where shown on the electrical plans for ATC compliance with Paragraph E below. In general, this will be used for powering terminal controllers and actuators. D. Electric Wiring: 1. All electric wiring, wiring connections and all interlocking required for the installation of the temperature control system, as herein specified, to be provided by the ATC contractor, unless specifically shown on the Electrical drawings or called for in the Electrical Specifications, Division 16. Power to valves and actuators to be by the ATC contractor, except as specifically noted in the Electrical drawings and specifications. 2. All wiring and wiring methods to comply with the requirements of the Electrical Section of the specifications. 3. Provide, on magnetic starters, all necessary auxiliary contacts, with buttons and switches in required configurations. 4. Provide wire mold as required for new network and control wiring. 5. Shall be protected from short cycling by means of adjustable minimum on-time. E. Equipment: 1. Automatic Control Valves a. Control valves shall be two-way pattern as shown and constructed for tight shut off and shall operate satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials. Two-way control valves shall exhibit equal percentage characteristics. Valves with size up to and including 2" shall be screwed with 250 psi ANSI pressure body rating; 2-1/2" and larger valves shall be flanged configuration. Proportional control valves shall be sized for a maximum pressure drop of 4.0 psig at rated flow (except as noted). Two-position control valves shall be line size and shall be provided with a 250 psi static pressure body rating. b. All valves shall be capable of operating in sequence when required by the sequence of operation. All control valves shall be sized by the control manufacturer and shall be guaranteed to meet heating and cooling loads specified. c. All control valves shall be suitable for the pressure conditions and shall close against the differential pressure involved. Valve operator connection type (screwed of flanged) shall conform to pipe schedule in this specification. d. Hot water control valves shall be normally open, single seated type with equal percentage flow characteristics. The valve discs shall be composition type with bronze trim. e. Valves shall be sized on the exact pressure drop for the equipment served to prevent over or under sizing the valves. Provide a separate submittal with all of this information included. 2. Damper a. General: Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 17 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1) Automatic dampers, furnished by ATC contractor, shall be single or multiple blade as required and/or shown on the drawings. 2) Numerous references are made in this specification as to the responsibility of furnishing and installation of dampers and operators. The ATC contractor shall closely coordinate his work with the HVAC Sub-Contractor to assure that all dampers are provided as required, and he shall examine all pertinent specification sections to assure that all dampers required but not provided by equipment manufacturers are provided under this contract. 3) All blank-off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller than duct sized dampers are the responsibility of the HVAC Sub-Contractor. 4) Dampers shall be installed by the HVAC Sub-Contractor under the supervision of the ATC contractor. 5) Operators shall be provided by the ATC contractor for all types of dampers whether they are provided by equipment manufacturer or by the ATC contractor. b. Dampers: 1) All damper frames shall be constructed of 13-gauge galvanized sheet metal and shall have flanges for duct mounting. Dampers installed in stainless steel and aluminum duct work shall be constructed of type 316L stainless steel (frame and blades). 2) Damper blades shall not exceed 6" width. All blades shall be of corrugated type construction, fabricated from two (2) sheets of 22-gauge galvanized sheet steel, spot welded together, blades shall be suitable for high velocity performance. Damper leakage shall be 2% or less at 5 inches W.C. 3) All damper bearings shall be made of nylon. Bushings that turn in the bearings shall be oil impregnated sintered metal. 4) Leakage and flow characteristic charts must be submitted to the Engineer prior to installation. 3. Actuators And/Or Operators: a. All damper actuators/operators shall be fully proportioning, unless otherwise specified. They shall be quiet in operation and shall have ample power to overcome friction for damper linkage and air pressure acting on louvers to position dampers accurately and smoothly. The damper actuator/operator mounting arrangement shall be outside the airstream wherever possible, with a maximum of 16 square feet per actuator/operator. b. The actuators/operators shall be capable of operating at varying rates of speed to correspond to the dictates of the controllers and variable load requirements. The actuators/ operators shall be capable of operating in sequence when required by the sequence of operation. The actuators/operator shall have external adjustable stops to limit the stroke in either direction. The actuator/operator linkage arrangement shall be such as to permit normally open or normally closed positions of dampers as required. c. All dampers sequenced with valves or dampers shall be furnished with pilot positioners or panel mounted positive positioning relays to ensure proper control sequencing. d. For exact requirement and quantities of actuators/operators, see plans and coordinate with the HVAC Sub-Contractor. 4. Valve and Damper Actuators (Electronic): a. Actuators shall be of the gear train or hydraulic type. b. Actuators shall have integral mechanical stroke limiting adjustments to prevent actuator overstroke and automatic load sensing to protect from motor burnout in stall condition. c. All actuators shall be sized by the ATC contractor and guaranteed to provide torque and stroke characteristics for the applied duty. Output shall be compatible with outputs of the controlling device. All actuators shall be of the spring return type, linked normally open or closed as applicable and common to the application. Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 18 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA d. All actuators shall be of the direct analog fully proportioning variety. Two position or floating type control actuators may be used only if specifically mentioned in the sequence of operation. 5. Temperature Sensors: Temperature sensors shall be RTDs or thermistors. Sensor Time Constant shall not exceed 5 seconds for a 60% response to a step change in temperature. Sensor repeatability shall be 0.1IF or better. a. Space temperature sensor element shall be accurate within +0.5°F over a range from 40°F to 1001F. Sensors shall be housed in manufacturer standard miniature type thermostat cover and shall include exposed thermometer, setpoint adjustment and override button as specifically called for in the sequence of operation. b. Outside air temperature sensor elements for each of the controllers shall be accurate within +0.51F over a range from -20°F to 120°F. c. Duct sensors shall be of the averaging type. Element length shall be adequate for sensing the average cross-sectional temperature over the full duct cross-section. 6. Low Limit Thermostat: Electric low temperature warning thermostats shall have low point sensitive elements installed to cover the entire duct area, with minimum coverage of (20 linear feet minimum). These thermostats shall be two-position manual reset type. Where coils are two-banks, two (2) sets of freezestats, wired in series, shall be provided and hard- wired to shut down the supply and return fans and show an alarm on the FMCS, as applicable and specified herein. 7. Miscellaneous Control Panels: Details of each panel shall be submitted for review prior to fabrication. Locations of each panel shall be convenient for adjustment and service. Provide engraved nameplate beneath each panel mounted control device clearly describing the function of said device and range of operation. All manual switches shall be flush mounted on the hinged door. 8. All electrical devices within the panels shall be factory pre-wired to a numbered terminal strip. All wiring within the panel shall be in accordance with NEMA and UL Standards and shall meet all Local Codes. All wiring in occupied spaces shall be concealed whenever possible. Any exposed wiring shall be enclosed in painted wiremold. 9. Sequences of Operation: Provide control components for each system as required for the sequence of operation indicated on the contract drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install all items specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS, according to the applicable manufacturer's recommendations and shop drawings, the details shown on the drawings and as specified under this section. Provide all required hangers and supports. B. All welding done under this section shall be performed by experienced welders in a neat and workmanlike manner. All welding done on piping, pressure vessels and structural steel under this section shall be performed only by persons who are currently qualified in accordance with ANSI Code B31.1 for Pressure Piping and certified by the American Welding Society, ASME or an approved independent testing laboratory; and each such welder shall present his certificate attesting his qualifications to the Engineer's representative whenever requested to do so on the job. C. All pipe welding shall be oxyacetylene or electric arc. High test welding rods suitable for the material to be welded shall be used throughout. All special fittings shall be carefully laid out and Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 19 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA joints shall be accurately matched intersections. Care shall be exercised to prevent the occurrence of protruded weld metal into the pipe. All welds shall be of sound metal free from laps, cold shots, gas pockets, oxide inclusions and similar defects. D. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent fire or damage occurring as the result of welding operations. Sub-Contractor to obtain all relevant permits from Owner before commencing. this work. 3.2 INSULATION A. All of the insulation work shall be done by sub-contractors regularly engaged in this type of work in a neat and workmanlike manner. All insulation shall be completely sealed with no glass fibers exposed to the air. B. The entire water piping system, including piping, valve bodies, fittings, specialties, air separator, pump casings, shot feeder, etc., shall be carefully insulated throughout for thermal control and to prevent condensation. Special care shall be exercised to ensure that all piping, valve bodies and fittings are well insulated with vapor barrier at the fan-coil units, up to the final connection at the coil so as to prevent condensation from forming and dripping on the ceiling. All insulated equipment which requires servicing shall be insulated with removable sections. 1. All piping insulation in mechanical room shall be enclosed in a PVC Jacket, color to be as selected by the Engineer. 3.3 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall be installed complete with all required hangers and supports in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Furnish and install all steel structural support members for proper hanging and support of equipment. Provide vibration isolation on all hangers. C. All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. D. All equipment and associated components requiring access for periodic inspection, filter changes, or maintenance shall be located over accessible ceilings; if located above inaccessible ceilings with approval of Architect and Engineer, provide access panels with appropriate fire ratings for required access at no additional cost to the project. 3.4 SHEET METAL WORK A. All of the sheet metal work shall be done by sub-contractors regularly engaged in this type of work. B. Neatly erect all sheet metal work as shown on plans or as may be required to carry out the intent of these plans and specifications. C. All necessary allowances and provisions must be made by this sub-contractor in the case of beams, posts, pipes, iron work or other obstructions in the construction of the building or the work of other trades whether or not the same is shown on plans. Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 20 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA D. All ducts are to be rigid and are to be strongly and carefully supported with suitable braces or angles to keep them true to shape and to prevent buckling. E. All joints are to be made tight and all interior surfaces are to be made smooth. F. Protect all work under this section from injury during the progress of erection and until final acceptance by the Architect. G. All metal work in dead or furred down spaces is to be erected in time to occasion no delay in the work of other trades on the building. H. Supply collars to diffusers shall be installed inside the neck of the diffusers. Dampers on all registers and diffusers shall be installed in the open position. I. Joints in all ductwork throughout shall be sealed, Class-B. All ductwork shall be taped and sealed. J. During the progress of the work and after the completion of the same, this sub-contractor shall remove from the premises all dirt, debris, rubbish, waste materials, etc., cause by him in the performance of this work, together with all his tools and appliances. 3.5 MISCELLANEOUS IRON AND STEEL A. Provide steel supports and hangers required to support fans, tanks, air handling units, pipe, ductwork, and other equipment or materials. Submit details of steel supports and method of fabrication for approval. B. All work shall be cut, assembled, welded and finished by skilled mechanics. Welds shall be ground smooth. Stands, brackets, and framework shall be properly sized and strongly constructed. C. Measurements shall be taken on the job and worked out to suit adjoining and connecting work. All work shall be by experienced metal working mechanics. Members shall be straight and true and accurately fitted. Scale, rust, and burrs shall be removed. Welded joints shall be ground smooth where exposed. Drilling, cutting and fitting shall be done as required to properly install the work and accommodate the work of other trades as directed by them. D. Members shall be generally welded, except that bolting may be used for field assembly where welding would be impractical. Welders shall be skilled. E. All shop-fabricated iron and steel work shall be cleaned and dried and given a shop coat of paint on all surfaces and in all openings and crevices. 3.6 BALANCING, ADJUSTING, OPERATING, AND INSTRUCTIONS A. The HVAC Sub-Contractor shall engage the services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting and balancing of the HVAC systems. The HVAC Sub-Contractor shall submit to the owner at least three (3) qualified firms for the owner's review and acceptance in accordance with Division I, start up and adjusting. B. Engage a balancing company to adjust, balance, and operate the heating, ventilating and air- conditioning system and thoroughly instruct the Owner's personnel in all phases of care and Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 21 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA operation of the systems. The Balancing Company shall be certified by Associated Air Balance Council or by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. Before the air systems are tested and balanced, ducts and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned by the sub-contractor so that no dirt, dust, or other foreign matter will be deposited in or carried through the systems. For this purpose, cheesecloth shall be placed over each opening for entraining such particles during the cleaning operation. D. The Sub-Contractor as a part of this contract shall provide all materials, labor, and service of all sub-contractors for fulfillment of air and water balancing of all systems. The Balancing Company shall inform Sub-Contractor of all requirements ahead of time. E. HVAC Sub-Contractor shall provide additional sheaves, drives, belts, etc. as required for balancing of all fans within the specified fan horsepower at no extra cost to the project. F. All equipment shall be operated and adjusted and all air and water systems shall be adjusted and balanced, readings taken and recorded on an approved form submitted to the Engineer for approval, readjusted and rebalanced in accordance with the Engineer's review comments and resubmitted. G. Air Systems 1. Systems shall be adjusted and balanced so that air quantities at outlets are as indicated on the drawings and so that the distribution from supply outlets is free from drafts, and uniform over the face of each outlet. 2. If necessary, provide and install motor sheaves for roof top units and air handling units. 3. Adjustments shall be made by the Balancing Company to volume dampers at air outlets to produce the least pressure drop consistent with volume requirements. 4. After completion of balancing and adjusting, settings of dampers, shall be permanently marked by the Balancing Company so that they can be restored if disturbed at any time. 5. Direct reading velocity meters may be used by the Balancing Company for comparative adjustment of individual outlets, but air quantities in ducts have velocity of 1,000 feet per minute or greater, shall be measured by means of pitot tubes and inclined gauge manometers. Instrument test opening enclosures as specified shall be provided as required. 6. Adjustment of the temperature controls shall be coordinated by the person in charge of the balancing and adjusting and shall be performed coincidental therewith. In conjunction with the Automatic Temperature Control System, simulate a complete cycle of operation for each system. 7. After completion of the testing, balancing and adjusting of the air systems, six copies of a report showing the following information shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. The report shall be arranged as follows: a. Location of each air outlet or inlet. b. Dimensions or size of each outlet or inlet. c. Type: diffuser, grille, register, supply, return exhaust, and Ak value for each. d. Cfm of air as indicated on drawings for each outlet or inlet. e. Cfm of air as measured, after each complete system has been balanced and adjusted, for each outlet or inlet. f. After each complete system has been balanced and adjusted, the total cfm at fan discharge, static pressure at fan outlet, total static pressure for apparatus, fan speed, motor amperage for each phase and voltage shall be listed. g. The Balancing Company shall provide all instruments and accessories required to perform the tests. h. Upon completion of the systems, during the first stages of the first cooling season, the Balancing Company shall operate the systems until temperatures in all areas are uniform. The period of time shall be no less than a five-day, forty-hour period. During these times, Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 22 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA the Balancing Company shall keep at least two men on the job continuously, together with a man from the temperature control sub-contractor for the purpose of testing and balancing systems. H. Water System 1. Water circulating system shall be adjusted and balanced by the Balancing Company so that water quantities circulated through new circulating pump and connected coils, equipment, etc., will be as specified. 2. Where no meters are provided, the adjustment of individual coil circuits shall be based on return water temperature, provided air balancing and adjusting has been satisfactorily completed first. Temperature control valves on each branch shall be wide open during the balancing. Adjustment of water flows through coils shall be based on manufacturer's pressure drop data. Balancing cocks and valves shall be set. The settings of cocks, valves, etc., shall be permanently marked so that they can be restored if disturbed at any time. 3. The following shall be established and listed: a. Temperatures and water flow at the new circulating pump and each connected coil after new zone pump system has been balanced and adjusted. b. Pressure drops, manufacturer's ratings, and water flow at each connected coil after new zone pump system has been balanced and adjusted. c. Suction and discharge pressures at pump and total water flow at each connected coil after new zone pump system has been balanced and adjusted. 4. Motor amperage for each phase and voltage at new zone pump. I. The Balancing Company shall provide all instruments and accessories required to perform the tests. END OF SECTION 230000 Gienapp Architects HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 - 23 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 FILED SUB BIDS A. Electrical is stipulated as a Filed Sub-bid under Paragraph 1.03, Item 2 of the Form for General Bid. B. All sub-bids shall be submitted on the Form for Sub-bid furnished by the Awarding Authority, as required by Section 44F of Chapter 149 of the Massachusetts General Laws, as amended. C. Sub-bids must be filed with the Awarding Authority in a sealed envelope, before twelve o'clock noon, local time, on the date stipulated in the Advertisement. D. Specific information relating the sub-bidders in set forth in the Contract Documents, under the heading "Notice to All Bidders, including Sub-Bidders" and the attention of sub-bidders is directed thereto. E. The work to be done under this Section 26 00 00 - Electrical is shown on Drawings: E001, E002, ED100, E100, FA100. 1.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. PART A and DIVISION 01 of PART B, as listed in the TABLE OF CONTENTS, are hereby made part of this SECTION by reference thereto. B. After inspecting existing conditions at the site, examine the various trade SECTIONS of the Specifications and be thoroughly familiar with all provisions regarding work included herein. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. Conditions of the Contract and Division 01, General Requirements, apply to work of this Section. Where paragraphs of this Section conflict with similar paragraphs of Division 01, requirements of this Section shall prevail. B. Examine Drawings and other Sections of Specifications for requirements that affect work of this Section. C. As used in this Section, "provide" means "furnish and install" and "HVAC" means "Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning" and "POS" means "Provided Under Other Sections". "Furnish" means "to purchase and deliver to the project site complete with every necessary appurtenance and support," and "Install" means "to unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation and the proper location in the project." Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 1 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA D. Perform work and provide material and equipment as shown on Drawings and as specified or indicated in this Section of the Specifications. Completely coordinate work of this Section with work of other trades and provide a complete and fully functional installation. Drawings and Specifications from complimentary requirements; provide work specified and not shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although work is not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. Remove all debris caused by contractors' work. E. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and work included in Contract. It is not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting or component; however, Contract Documents require components and materials whether or not indicated or specified as necessary to make the installation complete and operational. F. Perform work strictly as required by the rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances, and laws of local, state, and federal government, and other authorities that have lawful jurisdiction. G. Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, pay fees and obtain necessary approvals from authorities that have jurisdiction. H. As work progresses and for duration of Contract, maintain complete and separate set of prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and all changes from original Contract Drawings clearly and accurately, including work installed as a modification or addition to the original design. I. Work shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: 1. Panelboards, circuit breakers. 2. Safety disconnect switches (fused or unfused). 3. Lighting fixtures. 4. Conduit and raceways. 5. Branch circuit wiring. 6. Wiring devices and plates 7. New Addressable Fire alarm system devices and wiring. 8. Fire seal and fire-proof foam. 9. Sleeving. 10. All cores required for electrical equipment and conduit shall be provided by the electrical contractor. 11. Staging, scaffolding, ladders, chutes and other construction aids as required for all electrical work. 12. Pull boxes and cable troughs. 13. Grounding. 14. Supervision and approval. 15. Electrical connections to equipment provided under other Sections or by Owner. 16. Nameplates, labels and tags. 17. Testing 18. Required Electrical and Fire Alarm permits shall be paid for by the EC. 19. Electrical Demolition of Existing Electrical Items 1.4 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work to be performed under this Section is shown primarily on the Electrical Drawings. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 2 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA B. Electrical Contractor shall refer to Architectural, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Structural, and other Drawings and other Sections that indicate types of construction in which work shall be installed and work of other trades with which work of this Section must be coordinated. C. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, it shall be understood that the indication and/or description of any item, in the drawings or specifications or both, carries with it the instruction to furnish and install the item, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the indication or description. D. Items referred to in singular number in Contract Documents shall be provided in quantities necessary to complete work. E. Drawings are diagrammatic. They are not intended to be absolutely precise; they are not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting, and component. The purpose of the drawings is to indicate a systems concept, the main components of the systems, and the approximate geometrical relationships. Based on the systems concept, the main components, and the approximate geometrical relationships, the contractor shall provide all other components and materials necessary to make the systems fully complete and operational. Information and components shown on riser diagrams, but not shown on plans, and vice versa, shall apply or be provided as if expressly required on both. 1.5 REFERENCES A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or federal standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. The date of the standard is that in effect as the Bid date, except when a specific date is specified. C. Schedule of References: 1. ASNI American National Standards Institute 2. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 3. FM Factory Mutual System 4. IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers 5. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 6. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 7. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 8. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 1.6 VERIFYING CONDITIONS A. Before commencing any work under this section, verify all governing dimensions and examine all adjoining work on which this work is in any way associated or connected. Failure to visit the jobsite will in no way relieve the Contractor from installing the work according to the intent of these specifications and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Each bidder shall visit the site and inspect conditions affecting the proposed work. Failure to do so and misinterpretation of the Plans and Specifications resulting there from shall be entirely the responsibility of the bidder. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 3 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA C. Each bidder shall make note of the existing conditions affecting hauling, rigging, transportation, installation, etc., in connection with his work and shall make all provisions for transportation of all materials and equipment. D. Where field conditions require, the Contractor shall arrange for equipment to be shipped to the job, dismantled and assembled in place. 1.7 CODES, STANDARDS, AUTHORITIES AND PERMITS A. Perform work in strict accordance with the rules, regulations, standards, codes, ordinances, and laws of local, state, and federal governments and other authorities having legal jurisdiction over the site. B. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)shall list material and equipment. C. Give all notices, file all plans, obtain all permits, pay all fees and licenses and obtain all necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Deliver all certificates of inspection to the authorities having jurisdiction. No work shall be covered before examination and approval by Architect/Engineer, inspectors, and authorities having jurisdiction. Replace imperfect or condemned work conforming to requirements, satisfactory to Architect, and without extra cost to the Owner. If work is covered before due inspection and approval, the installing contractors shall pay costs of uncovering and reinstalling the covering, whether it meets contract requirements or not. 1.8 COORDINATION, SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Close coordination with other trades is required for performing this work. Bidder shall become thoroughly familiar with the requirements of Division 1, pertaining to coordination, including coordination drawings, scheduling, service interruptions and utility bypassing, layout for coring and other specified coordination. Pay particular attention to the following sections: 1. Section 01 73 29 — Cutting & Patching for requirements pertaining to the installation of the Work of this trade. 2. Section 01 31 00 - Project Management and Coordination, for requirements pertaining to coordination drawings. 3. Section 01 50 00 — Temporary Facilities and Controls, for temporary work to be provided by this Contractor, and for information pertaining to service interruptions. 4. Section 02 41 19 — Selective Demolition, for requirements pertaining to the coordination of new utility routing prior to the start of demolition. 5. Section 07 84 13 — Firestopping, for fire stopping around work which is penetrating fire-rated wall and floor assemblies. 1.9 DISCREPANCIES IN DOCUMENTS A. Address questions regarding drawings to Architect in writing before award of contract; otherwise, Architect's interpretation of meaning and intent to drawings shall be final. 1.10 SITE VISIT Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 -4 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA A. Before submitting bid, visit and carefully examine site to identify existing conditions and difficulties that will affect work of this Section. No extra payment will be allowed for additional work caused by unfamiliarity with site conditions that are visible or readily construed by experienced observer. 1.11 GUARANTEE AND 24-HOUR SERVICE A. Guarantee work in writing for one year from date of final acceptance. Repair or replace defective materials or installation at no cost to Owner. Correct damage caused in making necessary repairs and replacements under guarantee at no cost to Owner. B. Submit guarantees to Architect before final payment. C. Statement of guarantee requirements shall not be interpreted to limit owner's rights under law and this contract. D. Guarantee that all work installed will be free from any and all defects in workmanship and/or materials and that all apparatus will develop capacities and characteristics specified. E. If, during a period of one year from the date of final completion and acceptance of the work, any such defects in workmanship, material or performance appear, the Electrical Sub-Contractor will, without cost to the Owner, remedy such defects within a reasonable time to be specified in notice from the Architect. 1.12 CLEANING A. During the progress of the electrical work, clean up and remove all debris caused by this work. At completion, the Contractor shall clean all electrical equipment and systems and leave all work in perfect operating condition. 1.13 RESPONSIBILITY A. The structure and its appurtenances, clearances and the related services, such as plumbing, heating, ventilation and electric service have been planned to be legal, adequate and suitable for the installation of equipment specified under this section. The owner will not assume any increase in cost caused by differing requirements peculiar to a particular make or type of equipment, and any incidental cost shall be borne by the Electrical Sub-Contractor. He shall be responsible for the proper location of his required sleeves, chases, inserts, etc., and see that they are set in the forms before the concrete is poured. He shall be responsible for his work and equipment furnished and installed by him until the completion and final acceptance of this contract, and shall replace any work which may be damaged, lost or stolen, without additional cost to Owner. 1.14 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Materials, fixtures and equipment shall be properly protected and all floor openings/conduit openings shall be temporarily closed so as to prevent obstruction and damage. B. Protect and preserve all materials, supplies and equipment of every description and all work performed. Protect all existing equipment and property of any kind from damage during the operations. Damage shall be repaired or replaced promptly by the Contractor at his expense. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 5 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1.15 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A. Life safety shall be a primary consideration. The contractor shall provide all required and prudent material, labor and equipment to comply with applicable safety regulations. Further, the Electrical Contractor shall similarly provide all material, labor and equipment to comply with reasonable or generally accepted safety precautions as directed by the Owner or the Architect. B. Comply with all of the safety requirements of the OSHA throughout the entire construction period of the project. C. Furnish, place and maintain proper guards for prevention of accidents and any other necessary construction required to secure safety of life and property. D. Perform work only in areas of the building as approved by the Owner or his representative. Personnel and equipment access to the site, laydown areas, parking areas and areas of work shall only be as designated and allowed by the Owner. E. Also refer to Division 01, Safety Requirements. 1.16 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS A. Under this section of the Specification, base all required measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from referenced points established and be responsible for correctly laying out the work required under this section of the specification. B. In the event of discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated, notify the Architect in writing and do not proceed with the related work until instructions have been issued. C. Prior to bid, the Contractor shall visit the site and review the drawings to familiarize himself with the areas of work as well as the existing conditions to which the work of this section is to be installed, prior to design or installation. Any apparent discrepancies or conflicts between the new work and any existing conditions shall be submitted to the Architect in writing. Failure of the contractor to familiarize himself with all aspects of the new work and the existing conditions will not be a basis for extra costs to the contract. 1.17 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The work shall be so performed that the progress of the entire building construction including all other trades shall not be delayed or interfered with. Materials and apparatus shall be installed as fast as conditions of the building will permit and must be installed promptly when and as directed. B. Confer with all other trades relative to location of all apparatus and equipment to be installed and select locations so as not to conflict with work of other Sections. Any conflicts shall be referred immediately to the Architect for decision to prevent delay in installation of work. All work and materials placed in violation of this clause shall be readjusted to the Architect's satisfaction, at no expense to the Owner. C. Where work of this section will be installed in close proximity to work of other sections or where there is evidence that the work of this section will interfere with work of other sections, assist in working out space conditions to make satisfactory adjustment. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 6 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA D. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus and give information in advance to build openings into the work. Furnish and set in place all sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals. E. This Subcontractor shall, with the approval of the Architect and without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in his work as required by normal structural interferences, or by interference with work of other trades, or for proper execution of the work. F. This Subcontractor shall protect all materials and work of other trades from damage that may be caused by his work and shall make good any damages so caused. G. This contractor shall cooperate with the sprinkler and mechanical contractors regarding the installation of the new ductwork and new sprinkler systems. The relocation of existing conduits and the conductors within the conduits shall be coordinated with the other trades such that they do not impact the schedule. 1.18 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS A. It is the intention of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the Drawings, but mentioned in the Specifications or vice-versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided by the Contractor without additional expense to the Owner. B. The Drawings are generally diagrammatic. The locations of all items that are not definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only. The exact locations must be determined at the project and shall have the approval of the Engineer before being installed. The Contractor shall follow drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions. Where space conditions appear inadequate, notify the Engineer before proceeding with the installation. The Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. C. Size of conduit and methods of running them are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. To carry out the true intent and purpose of the Drawings, all necessary parts to make complete approved working systems ready for use, shall be furnished without extra charge. All work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid being unsightly. D. All measurements shall be taken at the building by the Contractor, prior to purchasing and installing the equipment and conduit. E. Existing conduits shown to be relocated are approximate. Not every conduit is shown. The contractor shall provide labor and associated materials to remove all necessary conduits in the hallways on the lower floor to provide space for the installation of HVAC ductwork and piping. 1.19 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Refer to Section 01 73 29—Cutting and Patching. B. All work shall be fully coordinated with all phases of construction, in order to minimize the requirements for cutting and patching. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 7 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA C. All such cases, openings, and sleeves shall be located accurately of the proper shape and size and shall consult with the Engineer in reference to this work. In so doing, confine the cutting to the smallest extent possible consistent with the work to be done. In no case shall piers or structural members be cut without the approval of the Engineer. D. All of this work shall be carefully done by workmen competent to do such work and with the proper and smallest tools applicable. E. Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be the respective contractor's responsibility therefore. 1.20 ACCESSIBILITY A. All work shall be installed so that parts requiring inspection, operation, maintenance and repair are readily accessible. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, but changes of substantial magnitude shall not be made prior to written approval from the Architect. 1.21 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data within 30 days after award of contract. Check, stamp and mark with project name submittals before transmitting to Architect. Indicate deviations from contract documents. B. Deviations from contract documents or proposed substitutions of materials or equipment for those specified shall be requested in separate letter whether deviations are due to field conditions, standard shop practice, or other cause. C. Within four weeks (except as noted otherwise) after award of contract and before ordering materials or equipment submit list of proposed materials and equipment and indicate manufacturer's names, addresses and identifying data. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted out of sequence. D. Schedule at least ten working days, exclusive or transmittal time for submittal review. E. Material and equipment requiring Shop Drawing and Product Data submittal shall include but shall not be limited to: 1. Panelboards, and circuit breakers 2. Safety disconnect switches (fused or unfused) 3. Lighting fixtures and controls. 4. Surface mounted raceway 5. Wiring devices and plates 6. Addressable Fire alarm equipment/device cuts. F. Remove, extend, alter and reconnect existing conduits as directed by Architect. Reconnect existing conduit that is cut and disconnected to accommodate work. Pull in new wires between nearest accessible outlets intended for reuse. Provide new conduit where wire cannot be pulled in existing. Connect new and existing work to function as complete, continuously grounded system. Remove conduit and equipment not intended for reuse and store where directed. Use conduit exposed by Work of this Contract in conjunction with nearest outlet intended for reuse as directed. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 8 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1.22 CONCRETE WORK A. All masonry and concrete pads shall be provided by the General Contractor. 1.23 PAINTING A. All finish field painting shall be provided by the General Contractor. 1.24 STANDARDS A. The latest published issue of standards, recommendations, or requirements of the following listed societies, associations, or institutes in effect at the date of Contract are part of this Specification. These shall be considered as minimum requirements; specific requirements of this specification and/or associated drawings shall have precedence. In case of conflict between published requirements, the Owner's representative shall determine which is to be followed. 1. ANSI American National Standards Institute 2. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 3. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 4. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 5. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 6. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act 7. NEC National Electric Code 1.25 OBTAINING INFORMATION A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipment that is to be furnished and installed. Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the work and to complete the project. 1.26 GIVING INFORMATION A. Keep fully informed as to the size and shape and location of all openings required for all apparatus and give full information to all other Contractors. Furnish all supports required for installation of apparatus herein specified. 1.27 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS A. Provide seismic restraints for conduit, lighting and equipment in accordance with the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, 780 CMR, 9th Edition, and referenced requirements of BOCA and NFPA. 1.28 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. The following work is not included in this section: Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 9 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1. Motors will be furnished and set in place under other sections. 2. Temporary water, heat, gas and sanitary facilities for use during construction and testing. 3. Automatic temperature control wiring. 1.29 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS A. All equipment and material must be approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to use. Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process offered for consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified and only if the term "approved equal" appears. The request for each substitution must be accompanied by complete specifications together with drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials, equipment or process. B. If a substitution of materials or equipment in whole or in part is made, the Electrical Contractor shall bear the cost of any changes necessitated by any other trade as a result of said substitution. C. All materials, equipment and accessories provided under this section shall be new and unused products of recognized manufacturers. 1.30 SUPERVISION A. Supply the service of an experienced and competent supervisor who shall be in charge of the electrical work at the site. 1.31 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All manufactured materials shall be delivered to the site in original packages or containers bearing the manufacturer's labels and product identification. B. Protect materials against dampness. Store off floors, under cover, and adequately protected from damage. C. Deliver products to site and store and protect same under the provisions of Division 1. D. Thoroughly inspect all electrical equipment and materials upon receipt at the job site for damage and correctness. 1.32 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance of Ownership of the Electrical system installed within this scope of work shall be contingent on passing a satisfactory system tests, performance test and other tests required in this spec to determine that the system will perform according to the contract requirements. B. The work shall be so performed that the progress of the entire building construction, including all other trades, shall not be delayed or interfered with. Materials and apparatus shall be installed as fast as conditions permit and must be installed promptly when and as desired. C. Confer with all other trades relative to location of all apparatus and equipment to be installed and select locations so as not to conflict with work of other Sections. Any conflicts shall be referred Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 10 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA immediately to the Engineer for decision to prevent delay in installation of work. All work and materials placed in violation of this clause shall be readjusted to the Engineer's satisfaction, at no expense to the Owner. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O & M) must be reviewed by the Owner's representative prior to contractor's retainage being paid. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 11 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. 2.3 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. General: 1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or wireways, unless otherwise indicated. All conduit shall be minimum 3/4" commercial trade size, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings. Metallic conduit fittings shall be made of steel or malleable iron only. Die-cast zinc-alloy fittings and fitting made of inferior materials, such as "pot metal", shall not be used. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: 1. Rigid Steel, Galvanized Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 12 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA a. Full weight galvanized steel conforming with UL 6 and ANSI C80.1. 2. Terminations a. Double lock nutted with insulated throat bushings in dry locations. b. Insulated, gasketed hub connectors in damp/wet locations. 3. Fittings and Conduit Bodies a. Fittings and conduit bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit. C. Metal Clad Cable (MC) 1. Where indicated on the drawings, type MC Cable shall be provided. D. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit 1. Flexible galvanized steel tubing over which is extruded a liquid-tight jacket of polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 1-1/4" size and smaller shall be provided with a continuous copper bonding conductor. 2. Connectors shall be steel or malleable iron with insulated throats. E. Wireways 1. Wireways, auxiliary gutters, and associated fittings shall comply with UL 870. 2. Wireways shall be of the screw-cover type, and of sizes indicated or as required by NEC. 3. Wireways shall be of raintight construction in wet locations. 4. Finish shall be paint, manufacturer's standard. 2.4 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet boxes for exposed conduit work shall be cast aluminum alloy with cast aluminum alloy covers. B. Switch boxes, receptacle boxes and other outlet boxes shall be standard 4" square with plaster rings or gang covers as required. C. Outlet boxes for various systems and components shall be as required by manufacturer. D. Provide screw-joint outlet boxes, with gasketed weatherproof covers in locations, where exposed to moisture, or next to water or steam connections, and where indicated as weatherproof on Drawings. E. Provide only enough conduit openings to accommodate conduits at individual location. Each box shall be large enough to accommodate number and sizes of conduits, wires and splices to meet NEC requirements, but shall be at least size shown or specified. Necessary volume shall be obtained by using boxes of proper dimensions. 2.5 DEVICE, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 13 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide junction boxes, pull boxes, terminal boxes and fittings as indicated on drawings, specified herein or wherever necessary to facilitate pulling or splicing of wires and cables of all electrical systems, and/or required by code. B. Junction or pull boxes not over 100 cubic inches in size shall be standard outlet boxes, except as noted otherwise. Junction and pull boxes over 100 cubic inches in size shall be constructed of code gauge sheet steel with screw covers and gaskets and shall be fabricated from approved detailed working drawings. Finish shall be paint over zinc chromate primer. C. Outlet boxes in unfinished areas shall be cast metal with threaded conduit hubs. 2.6 WIRE AND CABLE A. Wire and cable of sizes, quantities and types shown on drawings, schedules or specified herein shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. All wire and cable shall be installed in raceways, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire and cable work shall be in strict accordance with requirements of National Electrical Code and its latest revisions, both with respect to material and workmanship, except where insulation thickness and covering are required by these Specifications in excess of Code requirements. C. Minimum size wiring, unless otherwise indicated, branch circuit shall be#12 AWG. D. Branch circuit power, and control wiring, except as otherwise noted, shall have type THWN- THHN, 600 volts insulation. Unless otherwise noted, feeder wiring and branch circuit wiring sizes #6 AWG AND LARGER shall be Type XHHW, #8 AWG and smaller type shall be THWN-THHN. E. Wires and cables shall be single conductor. Conductors of sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded; wires smaller than #8 AWG shall be solid. Conductors shall be soft drawn copper and have a conductivity of not less than 98% of ASTM standards for annealed copper. Aluminum conductors will not be accepted. F. Sizes 12 and 10 AWG wire and cable shall be factory color-coded with a separate color for each phase of each system voltage used consistently throughout power systems. Size 8 AWG and larger shall be completely colored with vinyl tape wherever accessible. Colors shall be in accordance with those listed in Part 3 of this specification. G. Grounding conductors and equipment grounds unless bare, shall have a GREEN covering or shall be completely marked with green tape at boxes, conduit bodies or where otherwise accessible. H. Cables ties and straps shall be self-clinching types of one-piece molded construction. Bodies shall be of nylon and clinching clips shall be spring bronze. Ties and straps shall be Thomas & Betts Company, Types TY-25 and TY-35 or approved equal. I. Splices and taps in wires #8 and larger shall be made with solderless mechanical compression connectors designated for the purpose. Splices and taps shall be taped with approved tapes providing insulation not less than that of the conductors. Joints for wires #10 AWG and smaller shall be made with spring type screw-on connectors. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 14 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA J. Splicing tape shall be vinyl plastic tape 8.5 mils minimum thickness, flame retardant, abrasion, ultra-violet, moisture, alkali, acid, and corrosion resistant. 2.7 WIRE PULLING EQUIPMENT A. Provide polyethylene ropes for pulling wire. B. Provide fish wires in telephone and data conduits and other empty conduit systems required, without splices and with ample exposed lengths at each end, to allow for pulling of telephone and computer cabling. C. Provide wire pulling lubricants that meet applicable UL requirements as necessary. 2.8 WIRING DEVICES A. Provide wiring devices by single manufacturer. Cooper (Division of Crouse-Hinds), Leviton, Bryant, Hubbell or approved equal. Catalog designations of Cooper are specified to establish standards of quality for materials and performance. Devices shall be the color to match existing. B. Toggle Switches: 1. Single-pole shall be No. CSB120B, 20A., 120-277 V AC. C. Receptacles: 1. Duplex shall be No. 5362W, 125 V, 20A, 2-pole, 3 W, grounding. 2. All outlets other than 20-amp 120-volt receptacles shall be verified to be appropriate for the equipment being served, prior to installation. 3. Color: Match existing or as approved by the Architect. 2.9 WIRING DEVICE PLATES A. Provide smooth, high impact thermoplastic 0.035-inch (1-mm) thick device plates (color to match existing) by Cooper, Leviton, Bryant, Hubbell or approved equal. B. Device plates shall be manufacturer of wiring devices. C. Receptacle device plates for circuits other than 120 V, 2-wire, shall be engraved with '/4" letters, filled red, indicating voltage characteristics and circuit number of outlet. D. Outlets shall be fully recessed to surface. E. Telephone Outlet: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 3560-6. b. Leviton; 40649. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 15 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA- 568-B.1 complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863. 2.10 SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide quick-make/quick-break safety switches: Type HD, heavy duty, Class 3, Design 3, unless specified otherwise. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 12 enclosure for dry applications and NEMA 3R for wet. Switches shall be rated 240 or 600 V minimum as required for voltage of associated circuit and shall be rated in horsepower. Fuses shall interrupt locked rotor current of associated motor or ten times full rates load current, whichever is greater. B. Mount switch parts on insulating bases to facilitate replacement from front of switch. Current- carrying parts shall be high-conductivity copper. Contacts shall be silver-tungsten or plated. Provide positive pressure fuse clips and switch operating mechanism suitable for continuous use at rated capacity without auxiliary springs in current path. C. Switches shall withstand available fault current or let-through current before operating, without damage or rating change. 2.11 LED LUMINARES AND DRIVERS A. All Luminaires 1. Comply with IES LM-79-08 Approved Method for measuring lumen maintenance of LED light sources. 2. Comply with IES LM-80-08 Approved Method for electrical and photometric measurement of SSL product. 3. LED's shall be Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) compliant. 4. LED arrays shall be sealed, high performance, long life type; minimum 70% rated output at 50,000 hours. 5. LED luminaires shall deliver a minimum of 60 lumens per watt. a. LED's shall be "Bin No. 1" quality 6. Drivers shall be solid state and accept 120 through 277 VAC at 60 Hz input. 7. The LED light source shall be fully dimmable with use of compatible dimmers switch designated for low voltage loads. 8. LED color temperatures: CRI> 85, 2700K as noted +/- 145K. 9. LED color temperatures: CRI> 85, 3000K as noted +/- 275K. 10. Luminaires shall have internal thermal protection. 11. Luminaires shall not draw power in the off state. Luminaires with integral occupancy, motion, photo-controls, or individually addressable luminaires with external control and intelligence are exempt from this requirement. The power draw for such luminaires shall not exceed 0.5 watts when in the off state. 12. Color spatial uniformity shall be within .004 of CIE 1976 diagram. 13. Color maintenance over rated life shall be within .007 of CIE 1976. 14. Indoor luminaires shall have a minimum CRI of 85. 15. Luminaire manufacturers shall adhere to device manufacturer guidelines, certification programs, and test procedures for thermal management 16. LED package(s)/module(s)/array(s) used in qualified luminaires shall deliver a minimum 70% of initial lumens, when installed, for a minimum of 50,000 hours. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 16 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 17. Luminaires shall be fully accessible from below ceiling plane for changing drivers, power supplies and arrays. B. Power Supplies and Drivers 1. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher 2. Maximum driver case temperature not to exceed driver manufacturer recommended operation. 3. Output operating frequency: 60Hz. 4. Interference: EMI and RFI compliant with FCC 47 CFR Part 15. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 20% Maximum. 6. Meet electrical and thermal conditions as described in LM-80 Section 5.0. 7. Primary Current: Confirm primary current with Drawings. 8. Secondary Current: Confirm secondary current specified by individual luminaire manufacturers. 9. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with individually specified luminaire and individually specified control components. 10. Solid-state control components to be integral or external per each specified luminaire. Remote control gear to be enclosed in Class 1, Class 2, or NEMA 3R enclosures as required. C. Controller and Control System 1. System electronics driver/ controller to use coordinated communication protocols: 0-10V, or proprietary as required 2. The Contractor to ensure that external control equipment is compatible with LED control requirements 3. Provide connector types and wiring as appropriate for un-interrupted communication between devices, considering distance maximums, field obstructions, and accessibility. Ensure that connection points are optically isolated for system noise reduction. 2.12 GROUNDING A. Cables shall be of solid or stranded copper size as specified on the drawings. Cables shall be bare when installed in soil or in open air and shall be insulated with 600-volt green jackets in all runs installed in conduit. B. The grounding conductor bonding jumper shall be attached to the circuits, conduits, cabinets, equipment and the like, which are to be grounded by means of suitable lugs, pressure connectors and clamps. C. All feeder and three phase motor circuits shall be provided with an appropriately sized grounding conductor. Sizes shall be based on NEC Table 250-95. Grounding conductors shall also be provided wherever the raceway is not a suitable grounding conductor. 2.13 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Shall be bolt on type. B. Thermomagnetic trip. C. UL Listed compatible with existing. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 17 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 2.14 IDENTIFICATION A. Wire and Cable Identification 1. Conductor labels shall be white, adhesive self-laminating type. All text shall be typed. String tags shall not be accepted. Temporary tagging during construction shall be allowed, but all permanent adhesive tags shall be in place prior to requesting final acceptance. 2.15 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Scope: The Electrical Contractor shall provide new addressable devices and relocate existing devices as required on the contract documents. 1. Equipment shall meet requirements of Watertown Fire Department and State Fire Marshall. Installation shall meet FM requirements and following NFPA standards: a. Life Safety Code 101. b. National Electrical Code 70. c. International Fire Alarm Code d. NFPA 72 e. ADA f. Massachusetts State Building Code 9rh Edition 2. Submit shop drawings as specified. Shop drawings shall include terminal-to-terminal wiring schematics, exact color coding, location and function of each device and appropriate specification data sheets. B. Quality Assurance: 1. Each and every item of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product under the appropriate category of Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)and shall bear the UL label. C. Work Included: 1. The electrical contractor shall provide new fire alarm devices and wiring required including batteries, address loops, amplifiers, etc. to provide a complete and operational system, to supplement the existing system. Contractor shall coordinate with Fire-Lite for all additional equipment required to the existing fire alarm control panels, terminal boxes, etc. to provide a complete and operational system. 2. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control equipment, necessary power supplies, analog addressable initiating devices, audible and visual indicating appliances, conduit, wiring and all other accessories necessary to provide a complete and operational system as herein specified. 3. The electrical contractor shall carry all costs for fire alarm control panel and annunciator to be programmed to incorporate new and existing devices. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate programming with the manufacturer's representative, Owner and the Architect. E.C. must verify room names and numbers with the owner and fire department prior to programming the system. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 18 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA D. Submittals: Upon receipt of the notification to proceed, the contractor shall furnish the required number of submittals, as indicated elsewhere in this specification. At least one submittal shall include ORIGINAL, MANUFACTURERS' specification sheets. Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. A complete list of all equipment including descriptions, computer generated drawings and computer generated current drain calculations in both supervisory and alarm modes of operation. The submittals shall be presented in a single PDF file. Multiple PDF files or loose hard copy specification sheets will not be acceptable. 2. A system riser diagram indicating every device in the system and how they are interconnected. 3. Component wiring diagrams and how they interconnect with the risers. 4. An address directory indicating each device address, the model number of the device, the description that will appear on the display when the device is active, the type of device and what event(s) will occur when the device is in alarm condition. Each device shall be listed with the above information, typical or grouped devices will not be acceptable. This address directory may be printed directly on the riser diagram. 5. It is the intent of this specification that the submittal package, in conjunction with the manufacturer's installation manual, will be utilized by the installing contractor as the system's installation manual. E. Warranty and Final Test 1. The contractor shall warrant all equipment and wiring free from mechanical and electrical defects for one year from the date of final system acceptance. F. Manual fire alarm station: Provide addressable semi-flush, non-coded, double-action pull stations. Downward pull of lever shall actuate positive switch. Station shall remain actuated until reset. Key shall be used for drill and test purposes. "All devices shall be keyed alike. E.C. shall coordinate keys with fire department. G. System Smoke Detectors: 1. Provide addressable photo-electric smoke detectors. 2. Light source for detection chamber shall be solid-state light emitting diode (LED) with half-life in excess of 30 years. 3. Detectors shall have SPST N/O alarm contact and DPDT auxiliary contact to provide two separate auxiliary switching circuits, alarm latch circuit, ALARM lamp and tamper/reset switch. 4. Detector shall have functional test circuit capable of simulating maximum acceptable amount of products of combustion for alarm. Test circuit shall provide individual local test of detector and shall not require generation of actual smoke within building. 5. Detector shall detect smoke at 1% light obscuration. Light source shall be pulsed infrared LED at 24 V DC. Internal detector circuits shall be shielded against electrical interference. Detector stability shall be unaffected by high air velocity at ay sensitivity setting. H. Audible/Visual Alarm Signals 1. Provide audio/visual units compatible with the existing fire alarm control panel. Units shall consist of 24V strobe in clear lens rectangular dome, labeled in red FIRE, and audio component rated for 24V DC supervised operation. All devices shall meet the requirements of ADA and shall be synchronized. Verify audible/visual devices are compatible with the existing fire alarm control panel, prior to purchasing them. 2. Assembly shall be mounted on red lexan frame, on surface or flush wall box. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 19 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA I. Wiring 1. Wiring shall be SLC Intelligent Loop wiring and meet requirements of the NEC, Article 760, Fire Protective Systems for Building Fire Alarm Systems, and as shown on Drawings. Wires for local fire alarm system shall be color-coded to correspond with manufacturers wiring schematics submitted with shop drawings, sized as recommended by manufacturer of fire alarm system and installed in conduit. Combined cross sectional area of conductors or cables shall not exceed percentage of fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9 of NEC. Conduit size shall be coordinated with fire alarm manufacturer. 2. Fire alarm system wires in junction boxes shall be permanently tagged and identified. Each junction box capacity shall be 40% greater than that required for associated fire alarm system wires. Each junction box shall be painted fire alarm red and identified with white markings FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. 3. Provide, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, wiring, conduit and outlet boxes required for erection of complete system as specified and as shown on drawings. 4. Make connections within control equipment and devices with T&B Stakon spade terminals. Wiring within control equipment shall be secured with T&B Ty-raps and placed in wiring gutters. 5. Wiring shall be in conduit of same approved type as used for electric light and power wiring. Wires shall be at least#14 AWG, with type THWN insulation. 6. Final connections between equipment and wiring system shall be made under supervision of manufacturer's representative. 7. Fire alarm equipment shall be flush to surface where possible. All locations where this is not possible shall be approved in writing by the Architect. J. Fire Alarm Inspection and Testing Agreement 1. Provide fire alarm inspection and testing agreement in accordance with Owner's requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Application 1. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. 2. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. 3. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. a. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. 4. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 20 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA B. SUPPORT INSTALLATION 1. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. 2. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. 3. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg). 4. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: a. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. b. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. c. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. d. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. e. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm)thick. f. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts. g. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. h. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. 5. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site- fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. D. PAINTING 1. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 2. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 21 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.3 SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections. 1. Provide information about items furnished under this Section to be installed under other Sections, as necessary. 2. Obtain detailed information from manufacturers of equipment provided under this Section as to proper methods of installation. 3. Obtain final rouging dimensions and other information as needed for complete installation of items furnished under other Sections or by Owner. 4. Keep fully informed of shape, size and position of openings required for material and equipment provided under this and other Sections. Ensure that openings required for work of this Section are coordinated with work of other Sections. Provide cutting and patching as necessary. 3.4 TESTING, INSPECTION AND CLEANING A. Test and inspect work provided under this Section as required by Contract Documents, codes, standards and authorities that have jurisdiction, to satisfaction of Architect. Notify Architect and authorities at least 48 hours before testing or inspection. Do not cover work before testing or inspection. B. Furnish Architect with certificates of testing and inspection for electrical systems, indicating approval of authorities that have jurisdiction and conformance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Test wiring and connections for continuity and grounds before fixtures are connected; demonstrate insulation resistance by megger test as required. Insulation resistance between conductors and grounds for secondary distributions systems shall meet NEC requirements. D. Verify and correct as necessary: voltages, tap settings, trip settings and phasing on equipment from secondary distribution system to points of use. Test secondary voltages at bus in main panelboard and at other locations on distributions as necessary. Test secondary voltages under no-load and full-load conditions. E. Test lighting fixtures with specified led light sources in place for 10 hours; check fixtures in sections. Do not operate lighting fixtures other than testing before final inspection by Architect. Replace led drivers and/or circuit boards that fail within 90 days after acceptance by Architect within Contract Price. F. Provide necessary testing equipment and testing. G. Failure or defects in workmanship or materials revealed by tests or inspection shall be corrected promptly and retested. Replace defective material. H. Panelboard interiors shall be cleaned and vacuumed. Equipment with damage to painted finish shall be repaired to Architect's satisfaction. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 22 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA I. Equipment 1. After completion of this project, clean the exterior surface of equipment included in this section, including concrete residue. 3.5 NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplates in or on existing and new panelboards, junction boxes and cabinets, and for special purpose switches, motor disconnect switches furnished or installed under this Section. Nameplates shall designate equipment controlled and function. B. Nameplates shall be laminated black bakelite with '/4" high white recessed letters. Nameplates shall be securely attached to the equipment with galvanized screws. Adhesives or cements shall not be used. C. Nameplates for receptacles shall be provided as shown on details on the contract drawings. 3.6 WIRING METHODS A. Install wire and cable in approved raceways as specified and as approved by authorities that have jurisdiction. Surface metal raceways shall not be used unless explicitly specified and shown on Drawings. Do not use surface raceways on floor. Do not use armored cable except as approved by local code for lighting and receptacle circuits in suspended ceilings and stud-wall partitions. Homeruns for lighting circuits shall be 3-phase, 4-wire run in conduit. B. Wire from point of service connection to receptacles, lighting fixtures, devices, equipment, outlets for future extension, and other electrical apparatus as shown on Drawings. Provide slack wire for connections. Tape ends of wires and provide blank covers for outlet boxes designated for future use. C. Conductors #10 and smaller in branch circuit panelboards, signal cables, and signal control boards shall be bundled. Conductors larger than #10 in pull boxes shall be cabled in individual circuits. D. Two or more conduits installed instead of single conduit shall contain duplicate conductors, including neutrals and ground conductors where required; total capacity of duplicate conductors shall be at least equal to capacity of conductors replaced. E. Follow homerun circuit numbers shown on Drawings to connect circuits to panelboards. Where homerun circuit numbers are not shown on Drawings, divide similar types of connected loads among phase busses so that currents are approximately equal in normal usage. Connect each branch circuit homerun with two or more circuits and common neutral to circuit breaker or switch in three-wire or four-wire branch circuit panelboard so that no two circuits are fed from same bus. Where panelboard cabinets are recessed, provide conduits with sufficient capacity for future conductors for spare branch circuit protective devices and spaces in panelboard; stub up concealed to junction box. Provide extensions above ceiling. F. Electrical metallic tubing may be used generally, if approved by local codes, for lighting fixture and receptacle circuits, telephone, inter-communications, signal and instrumentation circuits, and for control circuits. EMT may be used generally, if approved by authorities, in masonry walls, above hung ceilings, in equipment rooms, in mechanical and electrical chases and closets, in exposed locations along ceilings or walls above normal traffic level and where not subject to Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 23 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA accidental damage or abuse. Do not run EMT exposed below 8 feet above finished floor. Conduit below 8'-0"AFF exposed shall be rigid steel. G. Install connectors and couplings as recommended by manufacturers. Compression fittings shall not be used with rigid steel, intermediate metallic or aluminum conduit. Set screw fittings shall not be used with rigid aluminum conduit and shall not be used for other applications, unless specified and approved by Architect. If set-screw connectors are used, tighten to imbed screws in conduit. H. Provide flexible conduits for connections to electrical equipment and to equipment furnished under Divisions 14 and 15 that are subject to movement, vibration or misalignment; where available space dictates; and where noise transmission must be eliminated or reduced. Flexible conduit shall be liquid-tight under the following conditions: 1. Exterior locations 2. Moisture or humidity-laden atmospheres 3. Where wash-down operations are possible 4. Where seepage or dripping of oil, grease or water is possible I. Run concealed conduit and EMT in as direct lines as possible with minimum number of bends of longest possible radius. Run exposed conduit and EMT parallel to or at right angles to building lines. Ends shall be free from dents or flattening. J. Conduit and EMT runs shall be mechanically and electrically continuous from service entrance to outlets. Conduit shall enter and be secured to cabinet, junction box, pull box or outlet box with locknut outside and bushing inside, or with liquid-tight, threaded, self-locking, cold-weld wedge adapter. Provide additional locknut for rigid conduit and wrench-tighten locknut for EMT or flexible conduit where circuit voltage exceeds 250 V. Locknuts and bushings or self-locking adapters will not be required where conduits are screwed into tapped connections. Vertical conduit runs that terminate in bottoms of wall boxes or cabinets shall be protected from entrance of foreign material before installation of conductors. K. Size rigid steel conduit, EMT and flexible metallic conduit as required by NEC except as specified or shown on Drawings otherwise. Unless shown otherwise on Drawings, telephone conduits shall be at least 1". L. Check raceway sizes to determine that green equipment ground conductor fits in same raceway with phase and neutral conductors to meet NEC percentage of fill requirements. Increase duct, conduit, tubing, and raceway sizes shown or specified as required to accommodate conductors. M. Unless specified or shown on Drawings otherwise, install conduit and EMT concealed. Unless specified or shown otherwise, conduit and EMT may be run exposed on unfinished walls and unfurred basement ceilings and in unfinished penthouses, attics and roof spaces. Provide stand- off clips for conduits on exterior masonry walls. N. Install conduit systems complete before drawing in conductors. Blow through and swab after plaster is finished and dry, and before conductors are installed. O. Expansion/Deflection Fittings: Conduit buried or secured rigidly on opposite sides of building expansion joints and long runs of exposed conduit subject to stress shall have expansion fittings. Fittings shall safely deflect and expand to twice distance of structural movement. P. Sealing Fittings: Threaded sealing fittings for rigid steel conduits shall be zinc-or cadmium- coated, cast or malleable iron; sealing fittings for aluminum conduit shall be threaded cast aluminum. Fittings that prevent passage of water vapor shall be continuous drain. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 24 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 1. Install and seal fittings as required by manufacturer's recommendations. In concealed work, install fittings in flush steel box with blank cover plate. 2. Install sealing fittings at following points, and elsewhere as shown: a. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous areas equipped with explosion-proof lighting fixtures, switches, receptacles and other electrical devices. b. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations. c. Where required by NEC. 3. Secure conduit system as required by NEC. Q. Provide inserts, hangers, anchors and steel supports as necessary. 3.7 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Conduits usage shall be as follows: B. EXPOSED/ SUBJECT TO WET/DAMP PERMITTED LOCATION CONCEALED DAMAGE, Y/N OR DRY CONDUITS Interior Exposed No Dry RGS Interior Exposed No Wet RGS Interior Exposed Yes Dry RGS Interior Exposed Yes Wet RGS *RGS- Rigid Galvanized Steel C. The following areas shall be considered damp/wet locations, and raceways installed according to NEC requirements for such locations: 1. Exterior Locations. D. All conduit shall be cut square and reamed at the ends. All joints shall be drawn tight. Exposed conduit shall be run parallel to or at right angles to the lines of the building. Right angle bends in exposed conduit shall be made with standard elbows, conduit body fittings, or conduit bent to radii not less than those of standard elbows. All bends shall be free from dents or flattening. E. Conduit shall be made mechanically and electrically continuous from service entrance to all outlets F. Conduit connected to wall outlets shall be run in such a manner that they will not cross water, steam or waste pipes wherever possible. Overhead conduits shall be run above water, steam or waste lines wherever possible. G. Liquid-tight flexible conduits shall be used for connection to motors and other electrical equipment when it is subject to movement, vibration, misalignment or cramped quarters or where noise transmission is to be eliminated or reduced. Proper angle connectors (straight, 45-degree, 90- degree)shall be used for the installation. Improperly installed connectors are not allowed. H. Pipe straps and hanger rods shall be fastened to concrete by means of inserts or expansion bolts, to brickwork by means of expansion bolts and to hollow masonry by means of toggle bolts. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 25 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA Hanger rods shall be fastened to beams and joists by means of swivel type beam clamps. Wooden plugs and shields and powder driven fasteners shall not be used. I. Individual horizontal conduits shall be supported by one-hole pipe straps or separate pipe hangers for sizes 1-1/2" and smaller. Spring steel fasteners may be used for sizes 1-1/2" and smaller in dry locations only. Hanger rods used with spring steel fasteners shall be minimum 1/4" diameter. J. Where two or more horizontal conduits run parallel and at the same elevation, they shall be supported on multiple pipe hangers. Conduit shall be secured to the horizontal hanger member. K. Pull boxes shall not be utilized for the vertical support of conduits. L. Every conduit system shall be installed complete and blown through and swabbed before conductors are installed. M. Wireways shall be used for mounting groups of disconnects and/or starters, or where shown on the drawings. 3.8 DEVICE, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Boxes shall be installed in rigid and satisfactory manner supported by bar hangers in frame constructions or fastened directly with wood screws on wood; bolts to hollow expansion shields on concrete or brick, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and machine screws or welded threaded studs on metal. Threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable for mounting of outlets on concrete construction. B. Location of devices shown on the Drawings is approximate. When necessary, devices shall be relocated at no extra cost within a 10'-0" radius to avoid conflicts with structural conditions or equipment of other trades. Outlets shall be symmetrically located according to room layouts. C. Boxes shall be secure to conduit by means of double steel locknuts (inside and outside) and malleable iron or steel insulated throat bushings. 3.9 WIRE AND CABLE A. 250 Volt Systems: 1. Conductors shall not be installed in a manner which will injure their insulation or covering. Conduit system shall be complete before any conductors are installed. Conductors shall not be installed until such time that the conductors can be suitably protected against the elements and damage. 2. Provide and use suitable cable pulling winches or equipment of adequate capacity in order to insure a steady, continuous pull. Before any wires or cables are drawn into conduits, the conduit shall be cleaned out by pulling a swab through the conduit with fish tape, and wires shall be pulled through conduit in such a manner as to avoid kinking or injuring the insulation. Only non-metallic approved cable lubricants shall be used when necessary. Cable lubricants shall be completely removed at panelboards, pull and junction boxes and other accessible locations. 3. All feeder cables shall be continuous from origin to panel or equipment terminations without running splices in intermediate pull or splice boxes. Where taps and splices are deemed necessary by job conditions, they shall first be approved by the Engineer and shall be made Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 26 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA in approved splice boxes with suitable connectors as noted herein. Special note is to be made when extending existing feeders. 4. No splices or joints shall be permitted in branch circuits except within accessible junction boxes. Splices in junction boxes shall be with enough spare wire to enable two or more splices to be remade with the same wire in event of a fault. When a bolted splice or connection presents an irregular surface, duct seal compound shall be molded around the joint. It shall make a smooth taping surface and prevent the formation of air pockets. 5. Use solderless pressure connectors on conductors of No. 8 AWG and larger and tape to provide insulation not less than that of the conductor. Solderless connectors shall be of rugged construction with multi-point contact on cable, ground contact surfaces for low resistance and low temperature rise, and with high pull-out strength. On conductors of 250 MCM or larger provide not less than 2 pressure connectors. 6. On conductor sizes No. 10 or smaller, connectors shall be molded composition with metal thread-on core. 7. At panelboards, junction boxes, conductors shall be identified with circuit numbers by applying suitable marking. 8. Neatly train all wiring within equipment boxes and panelboards. 9. Inspect all wire and cable for damage after installation. Replace all damaged conductors or insulation. Megger test all feeder conductors and record results in accordance with Section 01 70 00 of this specification. Verify all phasing of conductors and equipment. 10. Conductor color coding for power circuits shall be as follows: 3.10 Phase 120/208 volts A Black B Red C Blue Neutral White Ground Green 3.11 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide manufacturer's nameplates for front cover indicating the following information: 1. Switch Type 2. Catalog Number 3. H.P. Rating 4. Voltage Rating 5. Current Rating B. Provide safety disconnect switches at all locations as shown on drawings. Disconnects shall be mounted within sight, and proximate to the load served. Disconnects are to be mounted 48"AFF, unless otherwise noted. C. Provide engraved phenolic (white lettering/black field) nameplate indicating load being fed. 3.12 INSTALLATION OF LIGHT FIXTURES A. Coordinate installation of fixtures with installation of ceiling materials and suspension systems. B. Do not install fixtures until work of other trades that may damage fixtures is completed. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 27 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA C. Investigate lighting fixture locations and supports to ensure that no interference exists with hangers, ducts, sprinklers, pipes and other equipment. D. Provide plaster frames for fixtures recessed in gypsum board or plaster ceiling. E. Do not suspend or support lighting fixtures or safety chains from hung ceiling conduit or duct. Support fixtures with threaded rod from structural members only. F. Provide Unistrut below ducts where fixture locations coincide with duct runs. Provide threaded rods to support Unistrut. G. Luminaries shall be compatible with flexible wiring system. H. Support surface-mounted luminaries at least two concealed points to prevent rotation. I. Mounting height of suspended or wall-mounted luminaries shall be shown on Drawings. J. Locate ceiling-mounted fixtures as shown on reflected ceiling plans. Locate wall-and floor- mounted fixtures as shown on Electrical Drawings. 3.13 GROUNDING A. The entire electrical wiring raceway system of this project shall be made to form a continuous, permanent and effective equipment grounding circuit which shall be installed as follows: 1. All metallic threaded couplings and conduits shall be wrench-tight. 2. All termination of rigid conduits at all boxes, cabinets, and other enclosures shall be made with double locknut arrangement and a bushing. Bushings shall be insulating type. 3. All flexible metallic conduit and liquid-tight flexible conduits over 6' long or with conductors carrying over 20 amps shall have proper size ground conductor jumper bonded to the rigid conduit system and to the electrical equipment. 4. All electrical, metallic enclosures shall be effectively bonded by a separate green colored bonding screw. The use of a mounting screw for grounding will not be accepted. 5. All sections of wiring gutters and wireways, all outlet boxes and receptacle grounding terminals, all metal sections of continuous rigid cable supports and fittings and cable bus, and other built-up enclosures with bolted joining of sections shall be firmly bonded and effectively grounded. Conduit expansion fittings shall have factory furnished bonding jumpers. 3.14 GENERAL A. All devices shall comply with ANSI/TIA/ EIA 568-B.1, B.2, B.3 Standard. B. All telecommunication outlets shall be T568B wiring configuration. C. All termination equipment mounted on walls in Tel/data rooms shall be mounted on 3/4" AC plywood backboard with the"A" side as outward surface. D. Coordinate all work with all contract documents including but not limited to: 1. Architectural floor plans and equipment layouts. 2. Mechanical equipment. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 28 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA E. Coordinate all work with all on-site contractors including, but not limited to: 1. Other contractors and consultants. F. Cooperate and coordinate with work of other sections in executing work of this section. G. Perform work so that progress of entire project including work of other sections is not interfered with or delayed. Obtain detailed installation information from all manufacturers of equipment provided under other sections. H. Provide information as requested on items furnished under this section which shall be installed under other sections. I. Materials and Workmanship: Work shall be executed in workmanlike manner and shall be neat, plum, parallel to the building structure, perpendicular to all electronics and associated cabling and neat in appearance when completed. All work shall adhere to the standards as set forth in this specification. Maintain maximum headroom at all times. Do not run work exposed unless shown exposed on drawings. J. Material and equipment shall be new and installed according to manufacturer's recommended best practices so that completed installation shall operate safely and efficiently and be neatly installed. K. This contractor owns the greater quantity and better quality where conflicts exist. L. Continuity of Services: Do not interrupt existing services. Existing services shall remain operational at all times. If the existing services need to be disrupted for any reason the contractor shall contact the Owner (representative to be announced at a later date) and schedule the aforementioned shutdown. The contractor shall schedule the shutdown with the Owner 48 hours in advance. M. Any reference to telecommunication outlet shall indicate faceplate, modular insert, termination, cabling, labeling, testing, etc. N. All cabling shall be terminated at both ends unless noted otherwise. O. To minimize EMI interference, maintain maximum separation of tel/data cabling from power wiring and conduits wherever feasible; 6" separation generally acceptable. 3.15 FACE PLATES A. Provide all face plates for telecommunications outlets. B. Refer to the Construction E-Series contract drawings for the exact quantity and location of the telecommunications outlets. C. Refer to the Plans for configuration of faceplates. Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 29 Watertown Middle School Boy's Locker Room Renovation Watertown, MA 3.16 TESTING, INSPECTION AND CLEANING A. Test and inspect work provided under this Section as required by Contract Documents, codes, standards and authorities that have jurisdiction, to satisfaction of Engineer. Notify Engineer and authorities at least 48 hours before testing or inspection. Do not cover work before testing or inspection. B. Furnish Engineer with certificates of testing and inspection for electrical systems, indicating approval of authorities that have jurisdiction and conformance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Test wiring and connections for continuity and grounds before fixtures are connected; demonstrate insulation resistance by megger test as required. Insulation resistance between conductors and grounds for secondary distributions systems shall meet NEC requirements. D. Verify and correct as necessary: voltages, tap settings, trip settings and phasing on equipment from secondary distribution system to points of use. Test secondary voltages at bus in main panelboard, and at other locations on distribution systems as necessary. Test secondary voltages under no-load and full-load conditions. E. Failure or defects in workmanship or materials revealed by tests or inspection shall be corrected promptly and retested. Replace defective material. F. Clean panels and other equipment. Panelboard interiors shall be cleaned and vacuumed. Equipment with damage to painted finish shall be repaired. END OF SECTION 260000 Gienapp Architects ELECTRICAL 260000 - 30 (T)